JP2009201605A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of effectively enhancing the amusement of the play by using step-up advance notice presentation. <P>SOLUTION: In a first step-up advance notice presentation, the first advance notice presentation (an advance notice presentation A) is started when identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display parts (symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R), and the final advance notice presentations (advance notice presentations E and e) are executed after identification information is extracted and displayed in a first stopping variable display part (the left symbol display area 9L) where identification information is extracted first among the plurality of variable display parts. In a second step-up advance notice presentation, the first advance notice presentation (an advance notice presentation X) is started when identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display parts, and the final advance notice presentations (advance notice presentations Z and z) are executed before identification is extracted and displayed in the first stopped variable display part (the left symbol display area 9L) where identification information is extracted and displayed first among the plurality of variable display parts. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention includes a plurality of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other, and combinations of display results of identification information that are derived and displayed with a time difference in the plurality of variable display units are determined in advance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a combination of specific display results is obtained.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player (specifically, a state in which a gaming machine is controlled).

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be called a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  As such a gaming machine, a plurality of characters are successively switched at a predetermined timing as a notice effect that is performed after the variable display device starts variable display of the symbol and until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A plurality of types of notice effects (referred to as “step-up notice effects” in the present application) are prepared in advance, which are the notice effects, and the display timing (switching timing) of each character (each step effect) in the notice effects is different. Among the up-notice effects, one that selects and executes one step-up effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-118416 (paragraphs 0188 to 0194 and FIG. 18 etc.)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the display timing of each character in the step-up notice effect has been improved, the interest of the game has been improved. Therefore, there is a need for further improvements in the entertainment of games.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively improve the interest of a game by using a step-up notice effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display portions (for example, symbol display areas 9L and 9C in the effect display device 9) that variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left and right effect symbols) that can be identified. , 9R), and when the combination of the display results of the identification information derived and displayed with a time difference in the plurality of variable display portions becomes a predetermined combination of specific display results (for example, a big hit symbol), the player A game machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and prior to deciding whether or not a combination of specific display results is to be derived before a combination of display results of identification information is derived and displayed Determination means (for example, the part for executing the processing of step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination result of the prior determination means Based on a predetermined order during one variable display, a notice effect (for example, notice effects A, B, C, D, E, e, or notice effects X, Y, Z) is determined at a predetermined timing. , Z), a step-up notice effect (for example, a first step-up notice effect or a second step-up notice effect) that notifies stepwise that a specific display result may be obtained by changing one or more times. For example, a part for executing the processing of steps S846 to S855 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the step-up notice effect is a first step-up notice effect (for example, a notice effect). A first step-up notice effect that can execute A, B, C, D, E, e (see FIG. 84) and the first step-up notice effect Includes different second step-up notice effects (for example, second step-up notice effects capable of executing notice effects X, Y, Z, and z: see FIGS. 85 to 87), and the notice effect execution means performs step up The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed as the notice effect, and in the first step-up notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display units. The execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started, and the first stop variable display part (for example, the left symbol display area 9L) in which the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display parts is identified. After the information is derived and displayed, the final notice effect (e.g., notice effects E and e) ends, and in the second step-up notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed on all variable display portions. The first notice effect (for example, notice effect X) is started in a state of being in the first stop variable display portion (for example, left symbol display) in which the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. Before the identification information is derived and displayed in the area 9L), the final notice effect (for example, the notice effects Z, z) is ended (see FIG. 77).

  In addition, another gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display units (for example, symbol display on the effect display device 9) that variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left middle right effect symbols) that can be identified. Area 9L, 9C, 9R), and the combination of identification information display results derived and displayed with a time difference in the plurality of variable display sections becomes a predetermined combination of specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) In addition, the gaming machine is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and before the combination of the display results of the identification information is derived and displayed, Pre-determining means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the process of step S61) and pre-determining means Based on the determination result, a notice effect (for example, notice effects A, B, C, D, E, e, or notice effect X, at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display) A step-up notice effect (for example, a first step-up notice effect or a second step) that informs stepwise that a specific display result may be obtained by changing Y, Z, z) one or more times. For example, a part for executing the processing of steps S846 to S855 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the step-up notice effect is a first step-up notice effect (for example, , A first step-up notice effect capable of executing the notice effects A, B, C, D, E, e: see FIG. 84) and the first step up A second step-up notice effect different from the notice effect (for example, a second step-up notice effect capable of executing the notice effects X, Y, Z, z: see FIGS. 85 to 87), The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed as the step-up notice effect, and the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display units in the first step-up notice effect. The start of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started, and the variable display part (for example, middle symbol display area 9C) other than the last stop where the identification information is derived and displayed last among the plurality of variable display parts. After the identification information is derived and displayed in the variable display section (for example, the right symbol display area 9R), and after reaching the reach state constituting a part of the combination of the specific display results When the final notice effect (for example, notice effects E, e) is finished and the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts in the second step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, notice) The execution of the effect X) is started, and the final notice effect (for example, the notice effects Z, z) is ended before the reach state is reached (see FIG. 81).

  The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect (for example, a first step-up notice effect capable of executing the notice effects A, B, C, D, E, and e: see FIG. 84) and the first step up notice effect. A second step-up notice effect different from the notice effect (for example, a second step-up notice effect capable of executing the notice effects X, Y, Z, z: see FIGS. 85 to 87), As the step-up notice effect, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed at the same time during the variable display (for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 77 and 81, the high speed of the effect symbol). The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed simultaneously during the fluctuation period), and the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect is changed by a predetermined change timing. And control to change the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 81, The timing of changing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B is different from the timing of changing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y, and the timing changing from the notice effect B to the notice effect C and changes from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z. As a specific example, as shown in Fig. 89 and Fig. 90, the notice effect A of the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect X of the second step-up notice effect start simultaneously with the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol. In the first step-up notice effect, the notice effect A changes to the notice effect B, and then the second step. Tsu changes to announcement attraction Y from informational display X In flop informational display, then the announcement attraction from announcement attraction Y Z, is changed to z.) It may be configured so.

  Reach determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means 560 which determines the variable display pattern type of the identification information to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the pre-decision unit and the determination result by the reach determination unit. Display pattern type determining means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the processing of steps S101 and S102) and variable display pattern included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means (for example, Variable display pattern is determined from (variation pattern) Based on the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the processing of steps S103 to S105) and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the identification information is variably displayed. Variable display control means (for example, the portion of the production control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S520 and S845), and the variable display pattern type determination means determines that the reach state is reached by the reach determination means. Corresponding to what has been made, a plurality of types of variable display pattern types (for example, normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, CA2-3, CB2-1, CB2-2 variation pattern types, etc.) according to the reach state (For example, a game control microcomputer) 560 corresponds to the non-reach state in response to the determination that the reach determination means does not enter the reach state after the step S99 executes the process of step S99). One of a plurality of variable display pattern types (for example, non-reach CA1-1 to CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to CC1-3, etc.) (For example, the part that executes the processing of steps S101 and S102 after the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of step S100), the variable display pattern determination means is determined to be in the reach state by the reach determination means. In response to this, the variable display pattern is determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. A plurality of types of reach variable display patterns included in the determined variable display pattern type (for example, normal PA2-1 to PA2-4, super PA3-2 to PA3-8, PB3-1 to PB3-5, PC3-1) (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the change pattern determination table corresponding to the change pattern type set in S103, and the change pattern in steps S104 and S105). And the variable display pattern is included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination unit in response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the reach determination unit. Non-reach variable display patterns (e.g., non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach) (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation pattern type set in S103). The variation pattern may be determined in steps S104 and S105).

  In the first aspect of the invention, there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing according to a predetermined order during one variable display. The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, and the notice effect execution means is a step-up. The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed as the notice effect, and in the first step-up notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display units. The execution of the first notice effect is started, and the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display sections. After the information is derived and displayed, the final notice effect is ended. In the second step-up notice effect, the first notice effect is executed when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display units. It is configured to start and end the final notice effect before the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display portion where the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. Therefore, by changing the execution timing of the final notice effect in a plurality of step-up notice effects, the expectation of the specific gaming state can be felt, and further, the step-up notice effect can be reduced after the first stop, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the display result of the identification information.

  In the invention according to claim 2, there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display. A step-up notice effect executing means for executing step-up notice effect for stepwise notification, the step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed as the notice effect, and in the first step-up notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display units. The first notice effect is started, and the identification information is derived and displayed last among the plurality of variable display parts other than the last stop variable display part. In the second step-up notice effect, the final notice effect is terminated after the identification information is derived and displayed in the strange display part and the reach state is formed that constitutes a part of the combination of the specific display results. Since it is configured to start execution of the first notice effect when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and to end the final notice effect before entering the reach state, By making the execution timing of the final notice effect different in multiple step-up notice effects, the expectation of the specific gaming state can be felt, and further, the step-up notice effect is reduced after the variable display section other than the final stop is stopped It is possible to make the player pay attention to the display result of the identification information.

  In the invention described in claim 3, the notice effect execution means can simultaneously execute the first step up notice effect and the second step up notice effect as the step up notice effect in the same period during the variable display. The notice effect in the up-notice effect is changed at a predetermined change timing, and control is performed to change the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. As a result, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve the interest, and further notice in a plurality of step-up notice effects. Because the timing of changing the production is different, the player can Check and can play a game while expecting occurrence of a specific game state, it can be improved further interest.

  In the invention according to claim 4, reach determination means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means. And variable display pattern type determining means for determining the variable display pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the predetermining means and the determination result by the reach determining means, and variable display pattern type determining means The variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern from the variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the step, and the variable display of the identification information based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means Variable display control means for executing the display, and the variable display pattern type determining means is controlled by the reach determining means. In response to the decision to reach the reach state, one of a plurality of variable display pattern types corresponding to the reach state is decided, and the reach decision means decides not to reach the reach state. Correspondingly, the variable display pattern determination means is determined to be in the reach state by the reach determination means by determining one of a plurality of variable display pattern types according to the non-reach state. Correspondingly, the variable display pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types of reach variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination unit, and the reach determination unit does not reach the reach state. In response to the determination being made, the variable display pattern is changed to the variable table determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. Since it is configured to determine one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns included in the pattern type, a variety of effects can be executed even when the reach state is not reached without increasing the program capacity. The interest of the game can be improved.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The circular display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (see symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in FIG. 84, etc.). The display screen of the device 9 may not be fixed, and the three areas of the symbol display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. In addition, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the jackpot on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol reservation memory display 18a and the 2nd special symbol reservation memory display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect design as the design of is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in a decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as a blade monoton) 79a, which is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates, below the left and right. 79b is provided. In this embodiment, the blade objects 79a and 79b operate when a notice effect (blade object notice effect) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a displays variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the game state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). Transition to a state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data according to a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. The effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the blade objects 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, a changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation of the movable member. The example shown in FIG. 4 shows the operation of the movable member 78 when the re-change effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in the effect display device 9 is executed. In the re-change effect, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 4A (the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped) (FIG. 4). (Refer to (B) and (C)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols temporarily stop (see FIG. 4D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol re-varies (see FIG. 4E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol is finally stopped (confirmed). (See FIG. 4F). In the example shown in FIG. 4, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 4 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-changing effect ends, but when the re-changing effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the random R value.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S30). Specifically, payout control is performed in response to detection of a winning based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol variation rate every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo continuous chance. In the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that do not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) when the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Depending on the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “accurate” in the effect display device 9. After the effect symbols are variably displayed as in a case, a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match) In some cases, the stop symbol that is displayed is stopped or a stop symbol that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed. A display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, and a variable display mode of “small hit”. .

  FIG. 8 shows the variation patterns of the effect symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is an outlier symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 3. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 8, the re-variation is performed twice for the non-reach PA 1-5 variation pattern that is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect. Re-variation is performed twice or three times for a variation pattern that is used for reaching and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory view exemplifying a variation pattern of a production symbol prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -Super PA4-6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 Also, variation patterns of super PE1-2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 9, re-variation is performed twice, three times, or four times for a variation pattern that is used when it is not inaccurate and has a pseudo-continuous effect. For the variation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of suddenness and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, re-variation is performed twice or three times.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determines the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determines the pattern of pseudo-continuous production (for determining pseudo-continuous pattern)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 generates (2-1) a big hit type determination random number and (5) a normal symbol determination random number. The counter is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4, random 7) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 11 (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 11 (B) are set in the normal time big hit determination table. Each numerical value described in the right column of (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 11 (B) are set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 11A and 11B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value may be collectively expressed as “big hit determination value”.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number is shown in FIGS. If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown in B), it is decided to make a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit) or small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B indicates the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display. It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as “normal jackpot”, “based on the random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “surprise big hit”. The big hit type determination table 131 is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random 2-1, and is a determination value corresponding to each of "normal big hit", "probable big hit", and "sudden big hit" (big hit type determination value) Is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  12A to 12F and FIG. 13G are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 3). Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, a random number for random variation type determination (random 3) is selected according to whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability variation”, or “probability”. ) And a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A used when the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type is “ The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA 3-3 is determined. The judgment value is not assigned. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is determined. Judgment value is assigned.

  As described above, when the gaming state is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state (when in the normal state) When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability variation state is selected) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B and 132G (selected during the short time state) are compared, Accordingly, the assignment of the judgment value to each variation pattern type is different. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is made to the 2 round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state. With the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 12D used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. It is not done. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D (“normal”) selected according to the gaming state. ), The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132E (selected when “probability change”), and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F and 132G (selected when “probability”) are compared. Depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state, or a probable variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type differently. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. it can.

  FIGS. 14A to 14C are explanatory diagrams showing small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is based on a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, The judgment value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of the special CC4-1 is included.

  The variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 14B is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 14C is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations when the big hit type is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 12 (C), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 12 (F), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in G) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  FIGS. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not to change the variable display state of the effect symbol to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “off”. -2) is a table referred to for determination based on the above. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1. -1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination results indicating that the reach state is not reached, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to any of the determination results indicating the reach state is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. It has been. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “2”, is non-reach. Allocated to HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, “1” to “235”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A range determination value is assigned to non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 16A to 16C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C indicate the change pattern type based on the random number (random 3) for determining the change pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating that the reach state is set such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and for reach according to the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type, which is normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Data (determination value) for determining one of the fluctuation pattern types.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, the value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “128” corresponds to the determination result indicating that the reach is HA2-1. It is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result to reach reach 2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. The reach HA 2-1 is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) according to the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. The judgment value to be assigned is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “3” to “8”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  17A to 17C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate the variation pattern based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not set to the reach state. It is a table referred in order to determine the type as one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether it is non-reach HC1-2, and non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach It includes data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  FIGS. 18, 19A and 19B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, and the variation pattern type is selected as the super table. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result to select one of CB3-1 to super CB3-2, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-. 1, the hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is selected. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 4) value according to the variation pattern type. Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is included.

  20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B determine the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Depending on the determination result, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table.

  The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “reach”.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 20, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-5 corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern (see FIG. 8) for executing the specific effect. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “out” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. Making a decision to be one of the fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-5 and executing a specific effect (effect of non-reach PA1-4 ("slip") or effect of non-reach PA1-5 ("pseudo-run")) Can do.

  Also, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-1, and assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2. It has been.

  Then, for the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 including non-reach PA 1-5, a random number (random 3 for determining the variation pattern type) in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. ) Is compared with the non-reach HA1-1, and a determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA1-1, and “230” is assigned to the non-reach HA1-2. ”To“ 241 ”is assigned, and determination values in the range“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”to the non-reach HA1-4. A determination value in the range of “241” is assigned, and a determination value in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. Further, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the reach determination random number (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for determination of reach (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the numbers to be compared with the values of the random numbers for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the numbers of reserved storage “3” and “4” ( Determination value) and a determination value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned, and for the non-reach HA1-4, the reserved storage number is “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134A. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and a determination value in the range of “1” to “235” is assigned. Accordingly, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” or “2”, non-reach CA1-4. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower. Further, when the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, non-reach PA 1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including the lower becomes lower.

  In addition, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, the reach type is not the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type including the non-reach PA 1-5 (see FIG. 20). In the case of the reach HC1-1, a determination value in the range of “235” to “241” (a numerical value to be compared with the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type) is assigned, and the reach type is non-reach. In the case of HC1-2, determination values in the range of “234” to “241” are assigned. Further, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 15C, the determination value (random number for reach determination (random 2-2) assigned to the non-reach HC 1-1 when the reserved storage number is “2” or more. ) And the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HC 1-2 when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” (“1”). ”To“ 231 ”). In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, in the case of non-reach HC1-1, the non-reach HC1 than the determination value assigned to the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type. In the case of -2, since the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CC1-3 is smaller, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or more, the number of reserved memories is " Compared to the case of “0” or “1”, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is lower.

  Note that, when the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A illustrated in FIG. 20 is used, only non-reach PA1-5 can be selected as a variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous”, but a plurality of types including “pseudo-continuous” can be selected. The shift variation pattern determination table 138A may be configured so that the variation pattern can be selected.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 8, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “sliding” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not performed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than in the case of “0”. Further, when the number of reserved storages is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 21, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA2-2, the change pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-3, or the reach effect such as super PA3-4 to super PA3-6. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA2-3 or Super CB2-1, a random number (random 4 for determining the variation pattern) is added to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-3. ) Is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared.

  Further, for example, as for the variation patterns for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as the super-PA 3-3, super-PA 3-6, and super-PB 3-3 variation patterns, after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed, The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 is set in the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB3-3 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 or the super CB2-1 in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned.

  22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 22 shows a variation pattern used at the time of loss, and FIG. 23 shows a variation pattern used at the time of hit. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 includes super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4, which are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuous. -3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3 (see FIGS. 8 and 9) are set. The determination value corresponds to a specific variation pattern. Note that there are a plurality of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3. There are fluctuation patterns of the number of re-variations, but for non-reach PA1-5, the number of re-variations (number of pseudo-variations) including the initial variation (the first pseudo variation) is only one type of two. No judgment value is assigned. That is, in practice, data related to non-reach PA1-5 is not set in the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the production control device 100 controls the first design symbol display unit 9a or the second design design display unit 9b to start the design design variable display. In step 9, control is performed so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of effect symbols (and decoration symbols) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are an effect control command for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game or the start of a small hit game (a big hit start designation command or a small hit start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / rush start designation command corresponding to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). The command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a promising big hit (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / probability end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 24, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the variable pattern command and the display result specifying command are displayed in a variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator. The image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces effects in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are the first special symbol display 8a by the effect control microcomputer 100. Whether or not the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the symbol is changed by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to step S305 or step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbols and decoration symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a round display effect control command during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that the small hit pre-release process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit pre-release process is a process for starting the small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 27A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 extracts a value from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S215). . In the process of step S215, random R (big hit determination random number) and software random number 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S225). Note that, in the process of step S225, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of step S213-218 and the process of step S223-228 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, the data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 27A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first 1 "is set (step S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot or a small hit if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, set in the process of ending the big hit game, determined to be a normal big hit, and reset in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the random R value does not match any of the big hit determination values, it is checked whether the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (step S62). If they match, a small hit flag is set (step S63). Then, the process proceeds to step S75. If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11C is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). The type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2-1) stored in the random number buffer area (“normal”, “probability” or “surprise”) is determined as the jackpot type ( Step S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probability”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. Is “03”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  When the jackpot flag is set, the table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is used in accordance with the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the use variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the small hit flag is set, the small hit variation pattern is used as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (steps S93 and S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the table selection rule shown in FIG. Accordingly, one of reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbols is set to the reach state (step S95). Further, the random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 2-2 (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach, the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97). Note that the value before decremented by -1 in the process of step S53 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of step S97.

  If it is decided to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S <b> 101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Then, based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102). .

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (step S104). Then, based on the extracted random 4 value, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  As a variation pattern, a variation pattern including super-rendition production other than non-reach PA1-5 (super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, If the super PB 4-3, the super PB 5-3, or the special PG 1-3) is determined (step S106A), the CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random 7 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 7 Extract the value. Then, based on the extracted random 7 value, by referring to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as one of a plurality of types. (Step S106B). That is, the number of re-variation execution times (including the first pseudo variation) in the pseudo-continuous performance is determined. In addition, by the processing in step S106B, the variation time for executing the pseudo continuous effect is also determined.

  Next, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 24) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). When the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S113 and S114). If neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  When the CPU 56 confirms that the small hit flag is set in the process of step S116, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set, control for transmitting a display result 1 designation command is performed (step S118).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (step S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S120).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S139 (step S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / surprise start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of normal big hit and probability variation big hit (15 round big hit), 2 times in case of sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step). S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  In step S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S140). If the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S142). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S143). If the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit / probability start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S144). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S145). Further, the number of times of opening (2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S146). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S147). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S148).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S305). In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer by -1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S404) and decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (step S405).

  Further, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S406). For example, in the case of 15 round big hits, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S415).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening process during the special symbol process (step S306). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (step S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (step S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big prize opening (step). S435). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (step S438). When the value of the number-of-opens counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the big prize opening The value is updated according to the pre-release process (step S305) (step S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, a shorter period than 15R big hit may be used.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit end time (time for notifying the end of the big hit game, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S449), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (Step S307) (Step S450).

  When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probability variation big hit but the data indicating the sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hit / crash end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 ( Steps S443 and S444). When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probable big hit, control is performed to transmit the big hit end 1 designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S445). Then, control goes to a step S449.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent, if it is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / collision end designation command is sent. Send a command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. Note that the process of step S152 may be executed before step S442 in the special winning opening opening process.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state (step S161). Then, the process proceeds to step S162. If neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, the time reduction flag is set (step S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction number counter (step S163). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S164).

  Although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the small hit pre-release process in step S308 is the same as the big hit open pre-process in step S305, and the small hit open process in step S309 is during the big prize opening open in step S306. This is the same processing as the processing, and the small hitting end pre-processing in step S310 is similar to the big hitting end processing in step S307.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 38 to 41, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in FIGS. 38 to 41, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG. Further, the characters as the production information attached to the production symbols are also omitted. FIG. 38 shows an effect produced by the control of the microcomputer 100 for effect control when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, and when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display device 9. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 38 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 38 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 38D1 to 38D6 is executed. 38 (D1) to 38 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38A, for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, corresponding to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. The stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1. Then (see FIG. 52), the “slip” specific effect is executed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, when an effect symbol of “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, an effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 38 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (D2), by stopping the display of the “6” effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a fluctuation change display of the effect symbols is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 38 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in FIG. 38 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is obtained in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (see FIG. 38). 47). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  39 to 41 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the change of the production design is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  And, for example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 39 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, as shown in FIGS. 39D1 to 39D, all symbols are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. After that, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the effect symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 39 (C3) and FIG. 39 (D5), as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 40B, the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “out”. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying the effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the variable display of the effect symbols. When the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3, the reach effect β1, and the reach effect β2 are executed, as shown in FIG. The speed increases again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 40D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 40 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 40 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 40 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 40G, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result becomes “out”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the reach-rejected combination and end the variable display of the effect symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 40 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. Further, in the reach effect β2, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 40 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 40 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display). The directed design appears. When the variable display result is “out of line”, the displayed effect symbol is not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-out combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variable display is ended. In the reach effect α3, for example, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the third stage effect display in the reach effect α3 is not shown in FIGS.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the effect control process of steps S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number used for determining a production mode or the like is executed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command reception buffer, for example, a command reception buffer in a ring buffer format capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 24) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The displayed display result specifying command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S624). If the received effect control command is a small hit / surprise start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  Further, if the received production control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / abrupt end specification command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / abrupt end specification command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646). Further, if the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S649). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 45, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 45A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is set to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 45B).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 46, in this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for effect control includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. SR3, random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of first pseudo change, random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of second pseudo change, random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice, Random number SR5-2 for determining two-step-up advance notice, random number SR5-3 for determining advance notice of moving object, random number SR5-4 for determining button notice, random number SR5-5 for determining notice of frame, random number SR5 for determining notice of mini character -6, random number SR5-7 for determining blade mono notice, random number SR5-8 for determining other system liquid crystal notice, and random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect (slip) pattern. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random number SR4-1 of the temporary stop symbol at the time of quasi-continuous first variation is an effect symbol (temporary stop display) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after the first change. The random number SR4-2 of the quasi-continuous second variation temporary stop symbol is “left”, “middle”, “right” after the subsequent re-variation to be executed. "Is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  The random number SR3 for determining the sliding temporary stop symbol is used for temporarily or partially in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the specific effect of “sliding” is executed. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed.

  Random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect. Random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect. The random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect. The random number SR5-3 for determining the moving object notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect form) of the moving object notice effect. Random number SR5-4 for button notice determination is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the button notice effect. The frame notice determination random number SR5-5 is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the frame notice effect. The random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the mini character notice effect. The random number SR5-7 for determining the wing thing notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect form) of the wing thing notice. The random number SR5-8 for other system notice determination is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the other system notice effect. The contents of each notice effect will be described later.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effect of “slip” as one of a plurality of types. Random number.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 47A to 47D as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination. 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 47A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 48, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1-. From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right output types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Including the data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. No numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or jackpot combination. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the part of the combination. For example, even in a combination other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7 or the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the final stop symbol is not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a certain non-reach similar to the chance. It can be made not to be a combination of.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 50A and FIG. Final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 50 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that is a final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the final effect symbols that are combinations of reach deviation. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same effect symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 50 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the fixed effect symbols that are out of reach combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. However, in FIG. 50 (B), the difference between the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is shown as data that can specify the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3.

  In other words, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the unreachable combination is specified by the symbol difference that is the difference between the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol variation is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized design symbol that is the variable display result of the production symbol is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the production symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "medium" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-3, Super PB3-1 to PB3-3, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- 4 is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to any one of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-6, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” are included.

  For example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 51 are included in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 as a table for determining a definite effect symbol to be one of the jackpot combinations. include. 51. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 51 are left-stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as finalized symbols that are big hit symbols. This table is referred to for determining the middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used when it is determined to be a probable variation big hit, and the final stop symbol determination table 163B is used when it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit). used.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a specific production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 164A is included. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 52 slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of the slips TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG2-2, Special It is compared with the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change pattern of PG3-3. It is a numerical value (determination value) and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the specific performance pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-varied to a low speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at a low speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-4, the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the previous effect value (previous effect storage data: a value indicating the change pattern of the previous effect symbol). You may make it change distribution of. As an example, the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 that can be selected are changed according to which of the previous production values is 1 to 4. In addition, each of 1-4 assumes each of slip TP1-1-slip TP1-4. The effect control CPU 101 sets the previous effect value in the storage area in the RAM when the slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is determined. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4). When the effect control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, the “slip” specific effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. In this case, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Also, instead of changing the configuration of the specific effect pattern determination table 164A, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time is not controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 101. You may make it do. In that case, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A illustrated in FIG. 52 is used, but the determined slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is specified by the previous determination value. If they match, the effect mode is replaced (for example, if the determined slip effect mode is slip TP1-n, it is replaced with slip TP1- (n + 1)).

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 53 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol to be temporarily displayed when the “slip” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in (A) to (D) are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used depending on whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. 53 (E), for example. Selected as a table. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. According to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and the effect symbol of the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 54 is used as a table for determining the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in (A) to (C) are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PA4- 3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, or execution until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed Is selected as a use table according to the remaining number of re-variable display operations. For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The final stop is such that the displayed design symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the temporary stop symbol variation is displayed twice before (“pseudo-continuous variation”) is “2”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed before the pseudo continuous variation in which the determined effect symbol that is the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3 If the remaining number of all revariable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the symbol “left” is displayed. In the display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and the “middle” symbol. In the display area 9C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed for temporary stop.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations to be executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” in response to being any of -3, “Left” In the symbol display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, in the "right" symbol display area 9R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped, is displayed. In the symbol display area 9C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is selected as a use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 54A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 54B are the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by combinations of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 54C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, each time according to the number of times of re-variation (including initial variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. .

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 56, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbols until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and an effect display operation in a specific effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, various types according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. The control data for controlling the rendering operation is included, and the contents of various rendering controls, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. A plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effects control are stored as effect control patterns. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect operation in a big hit game state or a small hit game state such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various production controls according to the progress of the production, switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol (and decoration symbols) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) ) Is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability change promotion effect, a probability change promotion effect is executed when the probability change promotion effect executing flag indicating execution of the probability change promotion effect is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  Big hit end process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (step S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, based on data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not become reach (step S504). In the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 47A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47B is selected as a use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 shown in FIG. 48 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the left / right output type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of step S504, by referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Do not make the symbol stop symbol a combination of reach or jackpot. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7 or a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (step S505). In the process of step S505, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 50A is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same effect design to be the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 50 (B) is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 are obtained. The design difference from the production design is determined. The effect control CPU 101 determines an effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the process of step S505, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A to “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. ”And“ Right ”symbol display areas 9 </ b> L and 9 </ b> R are determined as the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol which becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If it is not determined to be out of place (step S501), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has been determined to be sudden or small hit (step S507). Whether or not it is determined to be a sudden or small hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command (see FIG. 24) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined that the accuracy or small hit is determined, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 (step S508). . As shown in FIG. 9, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 are all variation patterns in which the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the process proceeds to step S504, and the effect control CPU 101 finally stops in step S504. An effect design to be a design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the CPU 101 for effect control proceeds to step S516.

  If it is not determined for the winning accuracy and the small hit (step S507), the final stop symbol of the effect symbol of the big hit combination is determined (step S511). In the process of step S511, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 51A as the use table when it is determined to make a probable big hit. When it is determined to make a big hit, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 51B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the combination of the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that become the big hit symbol is finally determined. Determine as a stop symbol. In addition, when it is decided to make a probable big hit, a stop symbol that generally reminds of a non-probable big hit such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” as the left middle right definite effect symbols. May be derived and displayed (see FIG. 51A), but in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, do not assign a determination value to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. Then, when it is determined to be a probable big hit, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” may not be selected. In addition, when it is decided to win a probable big hit, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” can be selected as the left, middle and right finalized effect symbols, etc. In addition, by executing a so-called probability change promotion effect, the left middle right determined effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 may be changed to “7” or the like. It should be noted that in a gaming machine that does not notify the probability variation state, the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the game state (whether it is the probability variation state) by the confirmed effect symbol. May be.

  After executing any one of steps S504, S505, and S511, or after becoming “N” in the process of step S508, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (step S516).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific representation (“slip” or “pseudo-run”) (step S551). ). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes a specific effect, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “slip” (step S552). If it is a specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 selects a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as a use table (step S553). If the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 52 is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S554). That is, first, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of step S553. To do.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the previous effect value in the predetermined area of the RAM according to the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554 (step S555). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 3. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 4.

  By executing the process of step S555, it is determined every time when it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “slip”. Updated to the previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “slip” is determined as one of a plurality of types, data indicating the determined type of effect operation is stored.

  When the specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4), When the control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, in the process of step S554, the “slip” is specified according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. When the effect is executed, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time can be prevented.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” (that is, “pseudo-continuous”), the type of pseudo-continuous effect indicated by the received variation pattern command is processed in step S555. Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 is the “slip” specific effect, the temporary stop symbol is displayed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 53E based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554. One of the determination tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted. The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the value of the extracted random number SR3. The effect design which becomes either 1-3 and the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 is determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation specified by the received variation pattern command to a constant M in the case of the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. For example, when the number of re-variations (not including initial variation) in the quasi-continuation is one specific effect pattern, the constant M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations (including initial variation) in the quasi-continuation. If there is no specific production pattern twice, the constant M is set to “2”. In addition, “0” is set to the variable N indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 54A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation patterns are super PA3-3 and super PA3-6. , Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, the temporary stop shown in FIG. 54 (B) The symbol determination table 167B is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the first pseudo change is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-1, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to either the selected temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. Then, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S556 is terminated. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 54C as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the pseudo-second variation is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3- that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. 2. Determine the combination of KZ3-3. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M. Then, the process ends.

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S516, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (step S517). The effect control CPU 101 stores a plurality of types stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 56 in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and the specific effect pattern determined in step S516. Is selected as a usage pattern.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining and setting the content of the notice effect (step S518A). The details of the notice effect setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 65 and 66).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern and the content of the notice effect (step S518B). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. Further, the movable member 78 and the blade objects 79a and 79b are controlled in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 63 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each effect control pattern and notice effect. The process table corresponds to a more specific example of the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 56 and the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined to execute the notice effect in the process of step S518A, data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed in accordance with the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time corresponding to the timer value set as the process timer set value has elapsed, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, and By repeating the process of controlling the blades 79a and 79b, an effect in a single change in the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S519, the effect control device (the effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of an effect display device 9 as an effect part to be variably displayed, various lamps as an effect part, a speaker 27 as an effect part, and a movable member 78 and blades 79a and 79b as effect parts is started. (Step S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data. In addition, according to the movable member control data, a drive signal for operating the blade objects 79a and 79b is output.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). (Step S522).

  65 and 66 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting processing in step S518A. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach deviation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) has been received as a variation pattern command (step S571). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach shift pattern is received (Y in step S571), the first step up is performed using the first advance setting table for non-reach shift shown in the upper left of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the notice effect is determined (step S572).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect is a notice effect (preliminary notice from the first stage to a plurality of stages) at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one change (variable display) of symbols. This refers to a notice effect that informs the player in stages that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing (developing) one or more times. In this embodiment, the player is notified that the probability of a big hit is higher as the number of times of changing the notice effect increases (the more the notice effect is executed in multiple stages). Note that the step-up notice effect may end without the first notice effect changing.

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes stepwise. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 84 and the like), the content of the first step-up notice effect is that characters (human characters) appear step by step at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is directed to go. Detailed contents of the first step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 67, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A”), and the notice effect A are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “A → B”) in which the notice effect B is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed ( “A → B → C” development pattern) and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (“A → B → C → D”). Development pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice pattern B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (an extension pattern “A → B → C → D → E”). ), After the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, WARNING effect D, the effect is produced that announcement attraction e are executed in the order (development patterns of "A → B → C → D → e"), it is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode. The same applies to the other tables (FIGS. 68 to 71).

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 67, “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, No determination value is assigned to “A → B → C → D → e” (the number of determination values is 0). This is to prevent the occurrence of the advance notice effect C or higher when the reach does not occur, that is, to determine the occurrence of reach when the effect of the advance notice effect C or higher appears.

  In step S572, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  Further, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S572, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. Contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S573).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 85, FIG. 87, etc.), the content of the second step-up notice effect changes step by step (development, conversion) the background image of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is a production that will let you. The detailed content of the second step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the second notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 68, the notice effect “none”, the effect form (only the development pattern of “X”) that is executed only for the notice effect X, and the notice effect X are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “X → Y”) in which the notice effect Y is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed ( “X → Y → Z”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern “X → Y → z”). ) And are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S573, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the second step-up notice determination random number SR5-2, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S571, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern is not received (N in step S571), the normal reach CPU 101 receives the command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern. Whether or not (step S574). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received (Y in step S574), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined (step S575).

  In the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 67, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode (only the development pattern of “A”) executed only for the notice effect A, and the notice effect A are executed. The effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed (the development pattern of “A → B”) and the effect state in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed (“ A development pattern of “A → B → C → D”), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (the development of “A → B → C → D”). Pattern) and an effect mode in which the notice effect B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are sequentially executed after the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → C → D → E”). After the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B and the notice performance C, notice effect D, notice effect e are executed in order (the development pattern of “A → B → C → D → e”), and notice effect B is executed after notice effect A is executed. The notice mode C is temporarily terminated without being executed, and then the notice effect D is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → temporarily end → D”) and the notice effect after the notice effect A is executed. Although the effect B is executed, the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are executed in order (“A → B → temporarily end → D → E”). Development pattern) and the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are executed in order. (Development pattern “A → B → End → D → E”) After that, the notice effect B is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect e are sequentially executed (“A → B → end once → D”). → e ”development pattern) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In the first advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 67, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D → e ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D → E ”, and“ A → B → Temporary End → D → e ”are not assigned. The number of values is 0). This is for the purpose of determining the occurrence of super reach when an effect greater than the notice effect D appears.

  In step S575, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-1, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S575, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 68 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S576).

  In the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 68, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice effect X are executed. From which the notice effect Y is executed (the development pattern “X → Y”), and the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (“ X → Y → Z ”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern“ X → Y → z ”). And after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (the development pattern “X → temporarily end → Z”) is set. Has been. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S576, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S574, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the normal reach has not been received (N in step S574), the CPU for effect control 101 has received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super reach. Whether or not (step S577). If it is determined that a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation has been received (Y in step S577), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Then, the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined (step S578).

  In the first advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 67, the production mode having the same contents as the first advance notice setting table for deviation of normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. 67 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S578, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-1, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the contents of the first step-up notice effect in step S578, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Is determined (presence / absence, production mode) (step S579).

  In the second advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 68, the production mode having the same contents as the second advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 68 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S579, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  If it is determined in step S577 that the effect control CPU 101 has not received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from super reach (N in step S577), it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern has been received. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined using the jackpot first notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 67 (step S580).

  In the first notice setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 67, the production mode having the same contents as the first notice setting tables for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S580, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-1, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  Further, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S580, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second jackpot second notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 68 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S581).

  In the second jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 68, the production mode having the same contents as the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In this embodiment, the presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode are determined in the same notice setting table (first notice setting table, The second notice setting table) is used. However, the same notice setting table is not used for all types of jackpots, but a notice setting table is used for each of the big hits, probability variable big hits, sudden probability variable big hits and small hits, and the notice setting table corresponding to the big hit type is used. The presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode may be determined. In this case, by changing the distribution of the judgment value for the notice effect in each notice setting table, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the step-up notice and the appearance ratio of the effect mode according to the type of jackpot. For example, the probability variation big hit is compared to the normal big hit, and a table is provided so that a pattern that continues to be stepped up, such as a production mode of “A → B → C → D → e” and a production mode of “Temporary → Resume”, can be selected. By setting, the interest can be further improved. In addition, by setting the table so that “Simply End → Resurrection” is selected for Sudden Probability Big Hits and Small Hits, for example, “Skip End → Resurrection” is not selected for Small Hits, Even if the game is in a similar or identical manner and the game state is suddenly indistinguishable from the probable big hit and the small win (the game state in which the probable state is indistinguishable), the notice effect is produced. In this mode, it is possible to discriminate whether suddenly a big hit or a small hit has occurred, and the gameability can be improved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the movable object notice effect using the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 69 (step S582). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table, and the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the movable object notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit when the movable member 78 operates in a scheduled manner. That is, the movable object notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that the operating member 78 changes (develops and operates) one or more times stepwise). Detailed contents of the movable object notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 69, the noticeable effect “none”, the effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the first notice timing, and the second notice timing (a timing different from the first notice timing) are movable members. An effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the third notice timing (both the first notice timing and the second notice timing) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S582, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the movable object notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the movable object notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “first notice timing”, “second notice timing”, “third notice timing”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value, the moving object notice effect is displayed. Presence / absence and production mode are determined.

  The contents of the moving object notice effect are determined using the same big object moving object notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A plurality of movable object notice setting tables may be provided, and the contents of the movable object notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the movable object notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the button notice effect using the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 70 (step S583). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents of the button notice effect (presence / absence, effect form) are determined using the button notice setting table, and the contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the button notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but the possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player. It is an effect to notify that there is. That is, the button notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) one or more times stepwise in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120). Detailed contents of the button notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 70, the notice effect “None”, the effect that the first mail notice effect (the mail notice effect at the first stage of opening the mail) is executed at the early timing, and the first mail at the later time are shown. An effect mode in which a notice effect (e-mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a second e-mail notice effect (e-mail notification effect in two stages of opening an email) is executed at an early timing, and a second e-mail notice effect at a later time An effect mode in which (mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a card notice effect (notice effect in which a card appears) is executed at an early timing, and an effect mode in which a card notice effect is executed at a later timing Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-4 for determining the button notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the button notice setting table. Then, the notice effect assigned to the determination value that matches the random value (“none”, “early timing in the first mail notice”, “late time in the first mail notice”, “early timing in the second mail notice”, The presence / absence of the button notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on “slow timing in the second mail notice”, “early timing in the card notice”, “late timing in the card notice”).

  In addition, the content of the button notice effect is determined by using the same big hit button notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A button notice setting table may be provided, and the contents of the button notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, depending on the type of jackpot, by changing the distribution value of each table, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the button notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 (step S584). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. In other words, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern step by step once or a plurality of times). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 is provided with a table at the time of loss and a table at the time of a big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the frame advance notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-5 for frame notice determination, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the frame notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 (step S585). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table, and the content of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the mini character notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a notification that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a mini character (an image of a character with a small size) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Production. That is, the mini character notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) a mini character step by step one or more times).

  The mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 is provided with a table for a loss and a table for a big hit. In each mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the mini character notice notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Note that a plurality of types of mini character notice effects may be provided, and when mini character notice execution (mini character appearance) is decided, it may be determined which mini character appears. A character that can appear only at the time of a big hit may be set as the type of mini character. In addition to the jackpot notice, the mini character is a notice that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit with probability fluctuation at the time of the jackpot, a notice that suggests whether or not the fluctuation will reach, a notice that suggests whether to become super reach, It is equipped with multiple character mini-notices with different targets to be notified, such as a notice suggesting whether a pseudo-ream or a slide effect will occur, and each system is selected based on the result of the big hit determination and the contents of the fluctuation pattern You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the distribution value in the table is changed between the case of a loss and the case of a big hit. Different mini character notice determination tables may be provided, and the appearance and type of mini characters may be selected based on these tables. In this case, when a plurality of mini-characters are provided, a table may be provided for each system, and the appearance of each mini-character of the plurality of systems may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the presence / absence of the wing mono notice effect using the wing mono notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 (step S586). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the wing mono notice effect is determined using the wing mono notice setting table, and the content of the wing mono notice effect is determined using the bonanza pre-announcement setting table for a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the wing mono notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the wing items 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. That is, the blade mono notice effect is not a notice effect in which the feather items 79a and 79b are operated once or a plurality of times. The specific contents of the feather mono notice effect will be omitted.

  The blade mono notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 is provided with a table for losing and a table for big hit. In each blade item preview setting table, a notification effect “none” and a blade item notification effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the wing mono advance notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the blade object notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the blade object notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the feather mono notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execution”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the other system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 to determine whether or not there is another system liquid crystal notice effect (notice effect different from other notices such as step-up notice and button notice). Determination is made (step S587). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The other system liquid crystal notice setting table is used to determine the content (presence / absence, production mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice setting. When the big hit, the other system liquid crystal notice setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content.

  In this embodiment, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a predetermined image (an image of a character appearing in a step-up notice or an image displayed as a button notice, on the display screen of the effect display device 9). This is an effect of notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying an image different from the image of the mini character) at a predetermined timing. That is, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a notice effect that changes a predetermined image once or a plurality of times on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Specific contents of the other system liquid crystal notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91 and the like.

  The other-system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 is provided with a table at the time of disconnection and a table at the time of a big hit. In each other system liquid crystal notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the other system liquid crystal notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. It should be noted that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the other system liquid crystal notice announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S587, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the other system liquid crystal notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  Specifically, combinations shown in FIGS. 72 to 75 are conceivable as combinations of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. 72 to 75 are explanatory diagrams showing whether or not a combination of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice is possible.

  In this embodiment, as the first step-up notice effect effect form (development pattern), an effect form in which the notice effect changes twice (development in two stages) (an effect aspect of “A → B → C” or more) is executed. When this is done, the presentation mode ("X-> Y-> Z" or "X-> Y-> z") in which the previous-stage announcement changes twice (development in two stages) is performed as the second-step-up announcement production mode (development pattern). Is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more in the first step-up notice effect and an effect form “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” in the second step-up notice effect are executed simultaneously. Is prohibited. This is because, in this embodiment, when “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is executed as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, for example, (3-8) in FIG. As shown in (3-11) of FIG. 91, since the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, this is displayed. At this time, the notice effect “C” of the first step-up notice effect executed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect C may appear on the display screen). It is not possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73, when an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more is determined as the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, “X → The production mode of “Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” must not be determined.

  Therefore, the first aspect of the advance notice of the step-up notice is “A → B → C” or higher (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”). ”“ A → B → C → D → e ”), and when the effect modes“ X → Y → Z ”and“ X → Y → z ”are determined as the effect modes of the second step-up notice effect, As shown in FIG. 73, it is determined that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (N in step S588). And the process which changes (rewrites) the production | generation aspect of 2nd step-up notice effect to "X-> Y" which lowered step up by one step, for example is performed (step S589). When the production mode of “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, the production mode of the first step-up notice effect is, for example, step You may make it perform the process which changes (rewrites) to the production | generation aspect "A-> B" which lowered UP one step or more.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the duplication of the two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the notice due to the simultaneous execution of the two notice effects on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as an effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination”. The production mode of “→ D → e” can be determined. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect B is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice is once ended, and then the notice effect D is executed to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored. Here, after the step-up notice is presumed to end, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect Z or z of the second step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is restored. It is effective to show it. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → e”. When the production mode is determined, as shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, in step S588, the production mode of the second step-up notice production (“X → Y → Z”, “X → Y → z”) Are determined to be possible, and it is determined that the combination with the production mode of the second step-up notice effect (“none”, “X only”, “X → Y”) is impossible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S588), the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is changed to, for example, “X → Y → Z” in which the step-up is increased by one or more steps (rewrite). ) The process is executed (step S589). Even if it is determined that the combination is impossible, other notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) If any of the above is confirmed and another notice effect is executed, the process of changing the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is not executed. After pretending that the step-up notice was once completed, another notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) was executed. This is for the purpose of causing the notice effect D to be executed and to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” can be determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect X is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice has once ended, and then the notice effect Z is executed to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored. Here, after the step-up notice is presumed to end, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect B of the first step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is revived. Is effective. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Accordingly, when an effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 75, the effect of the first step-up notice effect is shown in step S588. It is determined that only the combination of “A → B” is possible as an aspect, and it is determined that the combination with other effects is impossible. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 75, when the production mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, “ It is determined that a combination with an effect mode (such as “A → B → temporarily end → D”) that is once finished is also impossible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S588), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to “A → B” is executed (step S589).

  In this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes twice or more (develops two or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When a production mode of “B → C” or more is executed, reach (normal reach, super reach) is always generated. Therefore, in the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation in the upper left of FIG. For this reason, when reach does not occur (when a non-reach shift pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D ”,“ A → B → C → D → E ”,“ A → B → C → D → e ”) are not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 67, the reach confirmation effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A” → B → C → D → e ”)), it is impossible to combine the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in step S588 (reaching confirmation effect). It is determined that the execution of the aspect is impossible. In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B”) that is not reach determination is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times or more (development of three or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → Super-reach always occurs when a production mode of “B → C → D” or more or “A → B → end once → D” or more is executed. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation in the upper right of FIG. 67, determination values are assigned to the production modes of “A → B → C → D” and “A → B → Temporary End → D” or more. Not. For this reason, when super reach does not occur (when a normal reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “ "A-> B-> C-> D-> E" "A-> B-> C-> D-> e" "A-> B-> End once-> D" "A-> B-> End once-> D-> E" "A-> B-> End once → D → e ”) is not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper right of FIG. 67, the super-reach determination effect modes (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D”). → e ”,“ A → B → temporary → D ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → E ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → e ”)). In step S588, it is determined that the combination of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect is impossible (execution of the super reach determination effect mode is impossible). In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B → C”) that is not super reach determination is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 combines a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and a button notice effect, and a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, first It is determined whether or not the combination of the two-step-up notice effect) and the other system liquid crystal notice effect is possible (step S590). In this embodiment, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the button notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect are all executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9, so the step up This is because the notice effect and other notice effects (button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) may not be executed at the same time.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the button notice effect (mail notice effect, card notice effect) executed at an early timing is combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. Is possible. On the other hand, button notice effects (mail notice effects, card notice effects) executed at a later timing can be combined with any effect mode for the first step-up notice effect, but for the second step-up notice effect, “ The combination of “X → Y → Z” and “X → Y → z” is not possible. Since the timing at which the button notice effect is executed and the timing at which the notice effect Z or z in which the notice image is displayed in full screen are overlapped, the button notice effect and the notice effect Z or z are executed simultaneously. It is because it is not possible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S591), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the button notice effect at the later timing to the effect mode of the button notice effect at the earlier timing is executed (rewrite). Step S592).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is an effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C →” for executing the notice effect C for the first step-up notice effect). D "" A-> B-> C-> D-> E "" A-> B-> C-> D-> e ") is impossible, and for the second step-up notification effect, the notification effect Z or z is executed. Combination with the production mode (“X → Y → Z”, “X → Y → z”, “X → temporarily end → Z”) is impossible. The timing at which the other-line notice announcement effect (see FIGS. 97 (5-5) and (5-6)) in which the notice image is displayed on the full screen overlaps with the timing at which the notice effect C is executed, and the notice image is displayed. Since the timing at which the other-line notice announcement effect for full screen display is executed and the timing at which the notice image Z or z for which full-screen display is executed are overlapped, the other system liquid crystal notice effect and notice effect C This is because the other-system liquid crystal notice effect and the notice effect Z or z cannot be executed simultaneously. If it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S591), for example, the effect is changed so that the effect mode of the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is not executed, or the notice effect C and the notice effects Z and z are not executed. A (rewrite) process is executed (step S592).

  Since the movable object notice effect is executed by moving the movable member 78 around the effect display device 9 in the rain, the step-up executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9 is performed at any timing. It can be executed simultaneously with the notice effect. Therefore, the movable object notice effect can be combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, after pretending that the step-up notice is once finished, any of the movable object notice, the button notice (late mail notice or card notice) or the other system liquid crystal notice is used. It is effective to make it appear as if the notice effect D is executed and the step-up notice is revived in response to the execution of. Such a first step-up notice effect and other notice effects (movable object notice effect, button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) can be linked effectively to give the player a sense of expectation.

  In such a case, as an effect form of the first step-up notice effect, an effect form in which the step-up notice is temporarily ended (that is, “A → B → temporary end → D”, “A → B → temporary end → D → E”). ”,“ A → B → End once → D → e ”), at least the second step-up notice effect Z, z, the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or The third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or another system liquid crystal notice effect needs to be determined. In the process of step S589, an effect mode in which the step-up notice is temporarily ended is determined as the first step-up notice effect, and the notice effect Z, z of the second step-up notice effect, the movable object notice effect (second notice timing). Or, when any of the button notice effect (slow timing) or the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not determined, the effect form of the second step-up notice effect is changed to, for example, “X → Y → Z”. However, it may be forcibly executed in any of the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or the other system liquid crystal notice effect. .

  The presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect aspect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, when the step-up notice effect once finished is restored, the notice effect D which is one notice effect of the step-up notice is executed. It is not always necessary to execute the notice effect D, and other different notice effects may be executed. That is, at the timing after the end of the step-up notice effect (the timing at which the step-up notice effect is recognized without being executed), other notice effects (button notice effect, movable object notice effect, other system) A liquid crystal notice effect) may be generated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the big hit to the discouraged player who recognizes that the step-up notice effect has once ended and recognizes that the possibility of the big hit is low. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to maintain a further expectation by generating a new notice effect thereafter. Note that it is not necessary to execute 100% of the new notice effect after the other notice effect is executed, and it may be executed at a predetermined rate. In that case, a new effect is executed by using a table in which the appearance rate at which a new notice effect appears is higher than when the big hit is determined to be out of place. Since the player can recognize that the possibility of a big hit is increased, the interest can be further improved.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (step S845).

  Next, in step S845, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data or the like). Is confirmed (step S846). When the step-up notice effect is being executed (Y in step S846), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the process data (step S847). If it is the step-up notice effect switching timing (Y in step S847), the effect control CPU 101 follows the contents of the process data (particularly, display control execution data including the notice effect, lamp control execution data, and movable member control data). The step-up notice effect is switched (changed, developed) (step S848).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 is operable (button effective period) (step S849). The operation button 120 is effective when the button notice effect is being executed. When it is the button valid period (Y in step S849), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of detecting whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on (pressed) (step S850). The on state of the operation button 120 is detected by inputting an on signal from the operation button 120. When the effect control CPU 101 detects that the operation button 120 is turned on (Y in step S850), the effect control CPU 101 executes an effect corresponding to the operation button 120 being turned on in the set button notice effect (email notice or card notice) (step S850). S851).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect based on the contents of the process data (movable member control data or the like) (step S852). If it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (Y in step S852), the movable member 78 is operated according to the contents of the process data (particularly, movable member control data) to execute the movable object notice effect (step S853).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of other notice effects (frame notice effect, mini-character notice effect, feather mono notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) based on the contents of the process data ( Step S854). If it is the execution timing of the other notice effect (Y in step S854), the other notice effect is executed according to the contents of the process data (step S855). That is, the frame lamp 28 is turned on with a predetermined lighting pattern, a mini character image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing, the blades 79a and 79b are operated, the screen of the effect display device 9 In addition, an image (an image of another system) different from an image used for other effects is displayed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop fluctuation.For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including the effect of “pseudo-continuous” (non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super When executing the processes of steps S841 to S845 based on PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3), as described above, the effect is such that a plurality of effects of pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed. Display control of the display device 9 is executed. In other words, the effect control data indicating the effect of the pseudo-continuous is also set in the process table corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 77 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various notice effects. As shown in FIG. 77, the other system liquid crystal notice, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice (a kind of button notice) and the mini character notice are displayed on the effect display device 9. Since these are notices using images displayed on the screen, these notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the first step-up notice is a notice of step-up in order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (E) (“A → B → C → D → E ”) or an advance notice (“ A → B → C → D ”) from step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (e) in this order. → e ”). Here, step (A) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect A is being executed, step (B) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect B is being executed, and step (C) is the notice effect. Step (D) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect D is being executed, and step (E) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect E is being executed. Step (e) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect e is being executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the second step-up notice is a notice that “step-up from step (X) to step (Y) and step-up from step (Y) to step (Z)” (“X → Y → Z "), or a notice (" X → Y → z ") that steps up from step (X) to step (Y) and steps up from step (Y) to step (z). Here, step (X) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect X is being executed, step (Y) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect Y is being executed, and step (Z) is the notice effect. The stage (period) in which Z is executed is shown, and step (z) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect z is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be executed simultaneously with the start of the variation of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In addition, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the e-mail notice effect, the card notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the feather object notice effect, the movable object notice effect, and the frame notice effect, the variation of the effect design changes rapidly. It is considered as a notice effect that can be executed from the time of transition to.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are different in timing at which the notice effect changes (that is, switching timing or development timing). Specifically, when the first step-up notice effect is executed and the second step-up notice effect is executed, step (A) first changes to step (B), and then step (X). Changes to step (Y). When step (B) in the first step-up notice changes to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice does not change to step (Z) or (z) (“A → B → C ”Is not developed until“ X → Y → Z or z ”as shown in FIG. 73: see steps S588 and S589). When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (C), reach (normal reach, super reach) is determined.

  On the other hand, when step (B) in the first step-up notice does not change to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice can change to step (Z) or (z). In this case, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the player can recognize that step (B) has not changed to step (C). That is, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the time point when step (B) does not change to step (C) and the step-up notice is recognized to have ended.

  When the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are linked so that the first step-up notice is restored after the first step-up notice is finished, the second step-up notice step (Z) or (z) is used. In response to the change, step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed. With such a configuration, the player's expectations can be met effectively.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the final step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), the left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) stops. Exit before. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the left symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step S (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). ) And the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol stops. According to such a configuration, after the left symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (to one), and the player can be focused on the stop symbol (right symbol, middle symbol) of the effect symbol. it can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, the e-mail notice notifies the player that the e-mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and opens the e-mail according to the operation of the operation button 120 of the player. The contents of the mail are notified, and the possibility of big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail. It should be noted that in the e-mail notice, “E-mail 2nd stage” is an effect of opening the e-mail in accordance with the second operation button 120 operation by the player and notifying the contents of the e-mail. In the case of “2 levels of mail”, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of “1 level of mail”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, the card notice displays the card, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and releases the card in response to the operation of the player's operation button 120 (that is, flips over). The content written on the card is notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the content.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the mini character notice indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping the butterfly) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. To recognize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, the wing mono notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the wing mono 79a and 79b when the effect design fluctuates at high speed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the movable object announcement is made by operating the movable member 78 at the time when the change in the production symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation (first notice timing) or in step (B) in the first step-up notice. After the execution, the movable member 78 is operated at the time (second notice timing) before step (D) is executed, or any of the first notice timing and the second notice timing (third notice timing) However, by operating the movable member 78, the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit. In this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is operated at the second notice timing than the first notice timing and at the third notice timing than the second notice timing, the possibility of a big hit is increased. Here, after it appears that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), the movable member 78 is operated at the second timing to execute the movable object notice, and then the step (D in the first step-up notice) ) Can be made to appear as if the first step-up notice has been restored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, the frame advance notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by illuminating the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, the other-system liquid crystal notice is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at the time after step (B) is executed and before step (D) is executed in the first step-up notice. By displaying a predetermined image (an image different from an image displayed in another liquid crystal notice), the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit. In this case, after the first step-up notice is presumed to have ended in step (B), the other-system liquid crystal notice is executed, and then step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed, thereby causing the first step. It will be possible to make it appear as if the advance notice has been revived.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern (notice pattern) that develops from step (Y) to step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 78, in the second step-up notice, step (X) is executed, and when step (Y) is executed, a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the second step-up notice is executed. In addition, since the suggestion effect has a function of leaving a remnant of the effect of the executed step (Y), the suggestion effect is also referred to as a reverberation display. In addition, the suggestion effect in this embodiment is an effect such that, as shown in FIG. 85 (2-4), a beetle that is trapped in a tree is hidden in a tree (in a leaf).

  Here, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (Z), the step changes to the step (Z) immediately after the step (Y) ends, and the suggestive effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (z), the step changes to the step (z) after the lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the step (Y), and the suggestive effect is the predetermined period. Executed.

  As described above, in the second step-up notice, when changing to step (Y), the suggestion effect is executed after the end of step (Y) and then the second step-up notice is finished, and step (Y) There are a pattern in which the step (Z) is executed without executing the suggestive effect after the end and a pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed for a predetermined period after the end of the step (Y) and then the step (z) is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (step) continues after execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing a first modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. 79 differs from the content shown in FIG. 77 in that a button notice (email notice, card notice) of another system different from the step up notice (first step up notice, second step up notice) is provided. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the mail notice of other systems as well as the above-mentioned mail notice, it is notified that the mail has been received, prompts the operation (on) of the operation button 120, and responds to the operation of the operation button 120. Open the mail and notify the contents of the mail. However, the timing at which the other-system mail notice is executed is the time before step (B) in the first step-up notice ends. By executing the e-mail notice at such timing, it is presumed that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), and then the other-system e-mail notice is executed, and then the first step-up notice step ( By executing D), it is possible to make the first step-up notice appear to have been restored. Further, in the mail notice of another system, the button valid period during which the operation of the operation button 120 is valid is a period including the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) executed before the button notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  Also, in the card notice of other systems, similar to the card notice described above, the card is displayed, the operation button 120 is prompted to be turned on, the card is released according to the operation button 120 operation, and the card is written on the card. Announce the contents. However, the timing at which the other-system card notice is executed is the time before step (B) in the first step-up notice ends. By executing the card notice at such timing, it is presumed that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), then the card notice of another system is executed, and then the step ( By executing D), it is possible to make the first step-up notice appear to have been restored. Furthermore, in the card notice of another system, the button valid period in which the operation of the operation button 120 is valid is a period including the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) executed before the button notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. 80 differs from the content shown in FIG. 79 in that there is a button notice (email notice, card notice) of another system different from the step up notice (first step up notice, second step up notice). This is that the button valid period in the system button notice spans between step (B) and step (C) in the first step-up notice.

  Specifically, step (B) in the first step-up notice is executed, and the timing at which the player cannot yet recognize whether step (C) is executed (in the example shown in FIG. 80, step (C) At the timing before a short time has elapsed since the start of the execution period, the notification of the mail reception or the display of the card is performed to start the mail notice or the card notice. In this embodiment, the operation of the operation button 120 is validated from the time when the notification of mail reception or the display of the card is performed in the email notice or the card notice, and the button valid period starts from that point. Further, the timing at which the player can recognize that step (C) in the first step-up notice is not executed (in the example shown in FIG. 80, the time after a short time has elapsed from the start of the execution period of step (C). Thereafter, the notification of the content of the mail or the notification of the content written on the card is terminated. When the notification of the contents of the mail or the notification of the contents written on the card is ended, the button valid period is ended.

  In this way, the button valid period of the button advance notice is determined based on the timing at which the player cannot recognize whether step (C) is executed in the first step-up notice (first recognition timing) and the player step (C). When the player operates the operation button 120 at the first recognition timing by setting a period including both timings at which it is possible to recognize that is not executed (second recognition timing), an early step (C ) Can be recognized, and when the operation button 120 is operated at the second recognition timing, a sense of expectation can be given again depending on whether or not the button notice is executed. Interest can be improved.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, when the player presses the operation button 120 at a timing when the player has not yet recognized whether or not the step (C) is executed, the mail is opened or the card at that time. To release. Therefore, the player steps in an early stage (before step (C) is executed) based on the contents of the opened mail and the contents of the opened card (whether or not the process proceeds to step (C)). Whether or not it changes to (C) can be recognized. Also, as shown in FIG. 80, when the player presses the operation button 120 after the timing at which the player can recognize that step (C) is not executed, the mail is opened or the card is opened at that time. Do. Therefore, even if the player does not change to step (C), the player is based on the contents of the opened mail and the contents of the opened card (whether there is a chance of winning or will develop into super reach) It is possible to recognize whether or not a big hit opportunity or development to super reach will be performed, and to give the player a sense of expectation again.

  FIG. 81 is a timing diagram showing a third modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. In the example shown in FIG. 81, in the final step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), the left design (first stop design that stops first) is stopped. It ends before the right symbol (second stop symbol that stops second) stops later. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the right symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). And the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach occurs. According to such a configuration, after the middle symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (one), and the player can be made to pay attention to the stop symbol (middle symbol) of the effect symbol.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed. Without execution, the process proceeds to step S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 has set a confirmation command reception flag indicating that an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (step S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on that, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the small hit symbol or the big hit display symbol is not displayed in the process of step S872 (that is, when the off-beat symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variation pattern command reception waiting process. The value is updated according to (Step S800) (Step S874).

  When the small win symbol or the big win symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S872, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and indicates that the big hit start specifying command has been received. Whether the command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / surprise start designation command has been received is set Confirmation is made (step S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878), and a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. Is selected (step S879).

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag is set. Also, in the processing of step S879, the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit (specifically, when receiving a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command: FIG. 17), when the process table corresponding to the “15-time open game start notification” shown in FIG. 57 is selected and determined to be a small hit or a sudden big hit (specifically, display result 4 designation) When the command or the display result 5 designation command is received (see FIG. 24), the process table corresponding to the “twice-open game start notification (common in rush / small hit)” shown in FIG. 57 is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control) According to the data 1) of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, various lamps as the effect part, the speaker 27 as the effect part, and the movable member 78 and the blades 79a and 79b as the effect parts) Control is executed (step S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S882).

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice. The first step notice (step-up notice on the right side) includes five notice effects (notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D, and notice effect E). In FIG. 83, the notice effect e is not shown. As shown in FIG. 83, as the notice effect A, an effect is performed in which a human character A appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, the characters A, B, and C appear simultaneously from the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen. As the notice effect E, an effect in which a large human character D appears from the right side of the screen where the characters A, B, and C are gathered in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The second step notice (left step-up notice) includes three notice effects (notice effect X, notice effect Y, and notice effect Z). In FIG. 83, the illustration of the notice effect z is omitted. As shown in FIG. 83, as the notice effect X, an effect in which a beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Z, there is an effect that as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the spirit expands and the beetle character expands.

  Next, a specific example of the first step-up notice will be described as the first notice effect. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first step-up notice as the first notice effect. The first step-up notice can execute up to five notice effects as described above. As shown in FIG. 84, a background image of the tree 200 is displayed on the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state in which the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 84 (1-1)), the variation of all the production symbols is started. (1-2) When the effect design changes to a high speed change and the start timing of the first step-up notice comes, the notice effect A (step ( A)), the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen (1-2) and goes to the left side of the screen. Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen (1-3) as the notice effect B (step (B)) in the first step-up notice, and goes to the left side of the screen. Note that, for example, in Steps S572, S575, S578, and S580 of FIG. 65, when it is determined that the first step-up notice only causes the notice effect A to appear, the notice is given even if the timing of the notice effect B appears. Production B will not appear. At the subsequent predetermined step change timing, the character C212 appears from the right side of the screen (1-4) as the notice effect C (step (C)) in the first step-up notice, and goes to the left side of the screen. Since the character C212 is set so as not to appear in the case of non-reach (see FIG. 67), it is determined that reach will occur at this point. Further, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 simultaneously appear from the left of the screen as the notice effect D (step (D)) in the first step-up notice (1-5). , It stops in the center of the screen. Characters A, B, and C are set so that they do not appear when they are out of normal reach (notice effect D is not executed) (see FIG. 67). Is fixed. Thereafter, after the right symbol (“7”) stops and reach occurs, a large human character D213 appears from the left side of the screen as the notice effect E (step (E)) in the first step-up notice (1-6). ), The characters are gathered in the center, and the display of the characters gathered in the center disappears in order to execute a predetermined reach state effect thereafter.

  Next, a specific example of the second step-up notice will be described as the second notice effect. 85 to 87 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the second step-up notice as the second notice effect. As described above, the second step-up notice can execute up to three notice effects. As shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 85 (2-1)), the start condition is satisfied. When all the effect symbols start to change (2-2), the effect symbol changes to a high-speed change, and when the second step-up notice starts, in the background of the effect display device 9, the second step-up notice As the notice effect X (step (X)), the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen (2-2). Thereafter, when a predetermined step change timing is reached, a notice effect Y (step (Y)) in the second step-up notice is displayed that the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 (2-3). When the second step-up notice ends with the notice effect X, an effect is performed in which the beetle character 220 flying from the right is hidden in the shade (leaves) of the tree without being confined to the tree. Thereafter, in the case of changing to the notice effect Z (step (Z)) in the second step-up notice at a predetermined step change timing, the process proceeds to FIG. 87 (2-7). On the other hand, when there is no change to the notice effect Z (step (Z)), the beetle character 220 perching on the tree 200 is hidden in the shade (leaves) of the tree as a suggestive effect (remnant display) (2-4). ) And then disappears completely (2-5). The enlarged contents of (2-4) and (2-5) are shown in FIG. Thereafter, in the case of changing to a notice effect z (step (z)) in the second step-up notice at a predetermined step change timing, the process proceeds to FIG. 87 (2-6). When the second step-up notice ends with the notice effect X → Y, it disappears completely (2-5). After the effect is performed, the notice effect z is not performed even if the step change timing elapses. . Therefore, when an effect that completely disappears is performed, the second step-up notice may end as it is.

  In FIG. 87 (2-7), as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands and the beetle character 220 expands. This notice effect is the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice. Thereafter, the shift symbol (“741”) is stopped and displayed without the occurrence of reach (2-8), or the reach is generated and the reach effect is executed (2-9). Also in FIG. 87 (2-6), as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands, the beetle character 220 expands, and the beetle character 220 moves around. This notice effect is the notice effect z in the second step-up notice. Thereafter, the shift symbol (“741”) is stopped and displayed without the occurrence of reach (2-8), or the reach is generated and the reach effect is executed (2-9).

  Next, a specific example will be described in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the third notice effect. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in a specific example of the third notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the notice effect A → B → temporarily end → D → E is executed as the first step-up notice, and the notice effect X → Y → Z or z is executed as the second step-up notice, and reach (super reach). A notice effect A → B is executed as a first step-up notice, and a notice effect X → Y or X → Y → Z is executed as a second step-up notice, and a pattern that becomes non-reach is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T1, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T2, and the notice effect of the second step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of X (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) is T3, and the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect Y of the second step up notice The end timing of the notice effect B (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, The period until the change of the effect C) is T4, and the end timing of the notice effect Y of the second step-up notice from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (end in FIG. 88) (that is, the notice effect Z). Or the start timing of the suggestion effect, the period from the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z or the change timing of the suggestion effect) is T5, the execution period of the suggestion effect is T6, and the end timing of the suggestion effect (that is, the start timing of the notice effect z) ) To the end timing of the second step up advance notice Z or the end timing of the advance notice z (that is, the end timing of the second step up advance notice) is T7. The end timing of the notice effect C of the first step up notice from the end timing (that is, the notice performance) The start timing of D, the period from the notice effect C to the change timing of the notice effect D) is T8, and the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (ie The start timing of the notice effect E, the period from the notice effect D to the change timing of the notice effect E) is T9, and the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice. The period until (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T10.

  89 to 91 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the third notice effect. As shown in FIG. 89, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 89 (3-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. Variation of the production symbol is started (3-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation in the period T1, and the character A210 is used as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice in the lower area of the display screen of the production display device 9. Appears from the right side of the screen, and the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (3-2). That is, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display. This is an effect in the period T2. Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice. At this time, since the change timing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y has not yet been reached in the second step-up notice (see FIG. 88), the beetle character 220 that is the notice effect X in the second step-up notice is An effect flying from the right side of the screen is continuously executed (3-3). This is an effect in the period T3. After that, while the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is being executed, the timing for changing from the notice effect X of the second step-up notice to the notice effect Y is reached, and the character B211 is moving in the left direction. Furthermore, the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice (3-4). This is an effect in the period T4. Thereafter, the character B211 disappears to the left of the screen, and the timing for changing from the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the notice effect C is reached, but the notice effect C is not executed, and the notice effect of the second step-up notice is given. Only the effect that the beetle character 220 stops on the tree 200 as Y is continuously executed (3-5). This is an effect in the period T5.

  Thereafter, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second step-up notice (when the notice effect X → Y or the notice effect X → Y → z is executed in the second step-up notice), the beetle insect character 220 is used as the suggestion effect. An effect disappearing behind the tree 200 is executed (3-6). This is an effect in the period T6. Then, when the second step-up effect is finished as it is (when the notice effect X → Y is executed in the second step-up notice), the notice effect of the first and second step-up notices is not executed and the display screen is displayed. The off symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed (3-7). On the other hand, when the notice effect z in the second step-up notice is executed, when the predetermined change timing after the suggestion effect (3-6) is reached, the background expands to the entire area of the display screen. The beetle character 220 is enlarged as the tree 200 is enlarged, and the effect that the beetle character 220 moves around is further executed (3-8). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect z) in the period T7. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, in which characters A210, B211 and C212 appear simultaneously from the left of the screen is executed (3-9) In addition, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (3-10). This is an effect in the period T8 to T10.

  When the notice effect Z is executed in the second step-up notice, the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged as the background is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen without executing the suggestion effect. (3-12). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect Z) in the periods T6 and T7. After that, when it becomes non-reach which does not become reach, the shift symbol ("146") is stopped and displayed on the display screen (3-14). On the other hand, after that, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which the character A210, the character B211 and the character C212 appear at the same time corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed (3). -12). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (3-13). This is an effect in the period T8 to T10. When the notice effect A → B of the first step-up notice is set, as shown in (3-9), (3-10), (3-12), (3-13) The reach state is executed without executing the notice effects D and E of the first step-up notice.

  Next, a specific example of the fourth notice effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the fourth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 92, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step up notice, the notice effect X → finish once → Z as the second step up notice, and the movable object notice is the first notice timing. A pattern executed at the second notice timing is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 92, T21 is a period from the start of the change of the production symbol to the start timing of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, and the movable object notice, and from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect A (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T22, and the second step up from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect X of the notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) is T23, and the notice effect Y of the second step-up notice is temporarily ended in FIG. ) From the start timing to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, notice) The period from the start timing of output C, the timing from the notice effect B to the change timing of the notice effect C) is T24, and the start timing of the movable object notice from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (temporarily ended in FIG. 88). The period from the start timing of the moving object notice to the end timing of the moving object notice is T26, and the end timing of the notice effect Z of the second step-up notice from the end timing of the moving object notice (that is, the second timing) The period until the end of the step-up notice) is T27, and the end timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice from the end timing of the notice effect Z of the second step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect D and the notice effect) The period from C to notice timing D change timing) is T28, and the first step T29 is a period from the start timing of the notice effect D of the advance notice to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect E to the notice effect E), A period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T30.

  93 to 94 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fourth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 93, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 93 (4-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (4-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T21, and the first step-up notice starts at the first area in the lower area of the display screen of the production display device 9. Character A210 appears as a notice effect A in the step-up notice from the right side of the screen, and an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice is executed (4-2). In addition, an effect that the movable member 78 provided around the display screen of the effect display device 9 operates (the effect that the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed as the movable object notice at the first notice timing. (4-2). This is an effect in the period T22.

  Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (4-3). This is an effect in the periods T23 and T24. At this time, since the second step-up notice is the notice effect X, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the shadow (leaf) of the tree, and the second step-up notice is ended. Next, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (4-4), that is, after the elapse of the period T25, the movable object at the second notice timing. As a notice, an effect in which the movable member 78 operates (an effect in which the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed (4-5). This is an effect in the period T26. Further, as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, corresponding to the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice, an effect is executed in which the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged (4). -6). This is the effect in period T27. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which character A210, character B211 and character C212 appear at the same time, corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, is executed (FIG. 94 (FIG. 94). 4-7)). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears is executed as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (4-8). This is an effect in the period T28 to T30. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice and the notice effect X is selected as the second step-up notice, the effects corresponding to (4-6) to (4-8) are naturally given. The reach production is performed without being performed.

  Next, a specific example of the fifth notice effect will be described. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the fifth notice effect. The example shown in FIG. 95 shows a pattern in which the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step-up notice, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the other system liquid crystal notice is executed. .

  As shown in FIG. 95, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T31, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (ie, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T32, and the notice effect of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of B (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect B to the notice effect C) is T33, and the start of the other system liquid crystal notice from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice The period until the timing is T34, and the first step is started from the start timing of the other system liquid crystal notice. T35 is a period from the end timing (ie, the start timing of the notice effect D, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect D) of the notice effect C of the up notice to the first step up notice. The period from the start timing of the effect D to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) is T36, and the first step up notice The period from the start timing of the previous notice effect E to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T37.

  96 to 97 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fifth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 96, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 96 (5-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The change of the effect symbol is started (5-2), the change of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed change in the period T31, and the first step-up notice starts at the first area in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Character A210 appears as a notice effect A in the step-up notice from the right side of the screen (4-2) and leaves to the left side of the screen. This is an effect in the period T32.

  Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (5-3), and goes to the left screen. This is an effect in the period T33. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (5-4), that is, after the elapse of the period T34, As the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 is expanded, and an effect is also performed in which the semi-character 221 perched on the tree 200 is also expanded (5-5). Or, as another aspect of the other system liquid crystal notice, an effect is performed in which the tree 200 expands as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, and the stag character 222 perched on the tree 200 also expands. (5-6). The other system liquid crystal notice effect corresponds to the effects (5-5) and (5-6). This is an effect in the period T35. Then, if there is a shift without occurrence of reach, the shift symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed on the display screen as it is (5-7). On the other hand, when the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, the effect in which the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 appear simultaneously is executed ( 5-8). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, the character D213 appears as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (5-9), and the characters are gathered in the center. Then, in order to execute the predetermined reach state effect thereafter, the characters gathered at the center disappear. This is an effect in the periods T36 and T37. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (5-8) to (5-9). become.

  Next, a specific example of e-mail notice will be described as the sixth notice effect. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an email notice as a sixth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 98, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 98 (6-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the variation of the production symbol is started (6-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation and the start timing of the e-mail notice, the mail reception operation in the e-mail notice is performed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 Then, “Mail display content 230”, “Operation button display content 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (6-3). Thus, it is notified that the mail has been received, and the operation button 120 is prompted to operate. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 6-4). In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (6-4), the contents displayed in the letter are “...” that is not very likely to be a big hit, “chance” that is more likely to be a big hit than “...”, There may be a plurality of types of effects such as “extreme heat” with high possibility. In this case, in order to determine which production mode is to be executed, for example, a production mode setting table having different data depending on whether it is a big hit, a reach in the case of a shift, or a super reach is provided. The effect mode may be selected from the data based on a predetermined random number. At this time, when the data of the production mode setting table is determined to be a big hit in the pre-determination, the determination value of the random number is distributed so that “super heat” can be selected more easily than when it is determined to be out of place. In addition, determination values of random numbers are distributed so that “...” Is not easily selected.

  Next, a specific example of a card notice will be described as a seventh notice effect. FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a card notice as a seventh notice effect. As shown in FIG. 99, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 99 (7-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the variation of the production symbol is started (7-2), when the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation and the start timing of the card notice, the operation of the card appearance in the card notice is performed near the center of the display screen of the production display device 9 Then, the characters “card display content 235”, “operation button display content 231” and “turn the card by pressing the button!” Are displayed (7-3). As a result, it is notified that a card has appeared and prompts the operation of the operation button 120. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 written on the card is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (7 -4). In this example, since the display content 235 of the card is “chance”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (7-4), the contents displayed on the card may be provided with the same production mode as the above-described mail notice. In this case, similarly to the mail notice, an effect form setting table for card notice may be provided, and the effect form may be selected in the same manner as the mail notice.

  Next, a specific example of the eighth notice effect will be described. FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the eighth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step up notice, the notice effect X as the second step up notice, and the first mail notice as the mail notice are executed at a later timing. Indicates a pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T41, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (ie, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T42, and the notice effect of the second step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period until the end timing of X is T43, and the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice from the end timing of the notice effect X of the second step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the notice effect from the notice effect B) The period until the change timing of production C) is T44, and the first step up T45 is the period from the start timing of the notification effect C (which once ends in FIG. 100) to the start timing of the email notification at a later timing, and T46 is the execution period of the email reception effect in the email notification. The execution period of the effect is T47, from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice effect to the end timing of the notice effect D (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E). The period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T49.

  101 to 102 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the eighth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 101, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 101 (8-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. Variation of the production symbol is started (8-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation at T41, and the character A210 appears as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice, and the notice in the second step-up notice. As effect X, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen (8-2). This is an effect in the period T42. Thereafter, when a predetermined step change timing is reached, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (8-3). This is an effect in the periods T43 and T44. At this time, since the second step-up notice is the notice effect X, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the tree (leaves), and the second step-up notice is ended. Thereafter, after the timing at which it is possible to recognize that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed, that is, after the elapse of the period T45, as an operation of receiving mail in the notice of mail, in the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the effect display device The characters “mail display content 230”, “operation button display content 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (8-4). This is an effect in the period T46. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 8-5). This is an effect in the period T47. In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect for causing the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (8-6). Then, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (8-7). This is an effect in the periods T48 and T49. For example, when the notice A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (5-8 to (5-9)). .

  Next, a specific example of the ninth notice effect will be described. FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the ninth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 103, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as the first step up notice, no notice notice effect as the second step up notice is executed, card As a notice, a pattern in which a card notice is executed at an early timing is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 103, T51 is a period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect). The period from the start timing of B, the timing from the notice effect A to the change timing of the notice effect B) is T52, and the period from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the start timing of the early card notice is T53. The period from the start timing of the card notice to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is T54, and the first step up From the start timing of the notice effect C (or once) The period until the end timing of the execution period of the card appearance effect in T is set to T55, the execution period of the effect of card release in the card notice is set to T56, and the notice effect D is started from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice effect. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) is T57, and the notice effect of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice. The period until the end timing of E (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T58.

  104 to 105 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the ninth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 104 (9-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (9-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T51. Appears (9-2). This is an effect in the period T52. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, when the predetermined step change timing is reached, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (9-3). This is an effect in the period T53. Then, during the execution of the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, as the operation of the card appearance in the card notice, the “card display content 235” and “operation button display” are displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The characters “content 231” and “please turn the card by pressing the button!” Are displayed (9-4). This is because the early timing is selected as the appearance timing of the card notice, and the card notice appears after the execution of the notice effect B ends at the late timing described in the eighth notice effect. This effect is an effect in the period T55. When the probability of a big hit is high, in response to the player operating the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time if no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 written on the card (this example) Then “chance”) is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (9-5). When the possibility of super reach is high, in response to the player operating the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time if no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 (this is written on the card) In the example, “Super” is displayed, and the possibility of super reach (subsequent big hit) is notified in advance (9-6). This is an effect in the period T56.

  Note that the notice is executed by rotating the card during a period in which the notice effect C in the first step-up notice can be executed. That is, the player can recognize that the card notice is generated during the execution period of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice, but the player can actually confirm the result of the card notice in the notice effect of the first step-up notice. It becomes after the period when C can be executed. This is because during the execution period of the notice effect B, the player does not know whether or not the notice effect C will be executed. This is because even if the result is displayed, the player may not pay attention. By displaying the notice result of the card notice at a timing after the player recognizes that the change to the notice effect C is not performed, the player pays attention to the notice contents of the card notice, and the notice effect is further enhanced. Become effective. Furthermore, even if the player does not change to the notice effect C at the present time of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice, the player has a sense of expectation that a notice that increases the possibility of a big hit by the card notice may be given. It can be recognized at an early timing and it can be interesting. Unlike the notice effect Z and z of the second step-up notice and other system liquid crystal notices, this card notice is not executed on the full screen, so the notice effect C is not executed as the first step-up notice. Even if it is the pattern (9-5) or the pattern (9-6) in which the notice effect C is executed, it can be executed simultaneously (this is the same for the mail notice. (See 10th notice effect).

  Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect for causing the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (9-7). Then, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (9-8). This is an effect in the periods T57 and T58. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (9-7) to (9-8). become.

  Next, a specific example of the tenth notice effect will be described. FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the tenth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 106, the example shown in FIG. This shows a pattern in which a card notice is executed at an early timing as a card notice without executing a notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 106, T61 is a period from the start of the change of the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect). The period from the start timing of B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T62, and the period from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the start timing of the e-mail notice is T63. The period from the start timing to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is T64, and the notice of the first step up notice E-mail notice from the start timing of production C (or once) The period from the start timing of the mail notice in the mail notice is T65, the period from the start timing of the mail opening in the mail notice to the end timing of the mail notice is T66, and the notice of the first step-up notice effect from the end timing of the mail notice The period until the start timing of the effect D is T67, and the end timing of the notice effect D from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) ) Is T68, and the period from the start timing of the first step-up notice effect E to the end timing of the first step-up notice effect E (that is, the end time of the first step-up notice) is T69. Yes.

  107 to 110 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the tenth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 107, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 107 (10-1)), when the start condition is satisfied, The variation of the effect symbol is started (10-2), and the variation of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T61, and when the start timing of the first step-up notice comes, the character A210 becomes the notice effect A in the first step-up notice. Appears (10-2). This is an effect in the period T62. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Next, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and “mail display content 230” and “operation” are performed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the mail reception operation in the notice of mail. “Displayed contents 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (10-3). This is an effect in the periods T63 and T64. The valid period of the operation button 120 for the mail notice continues until the notice effect C can be executed.

  When the player operates the operation button 120 at an early timing with respect to the displayed mail notice, the mail is opened at an early timing, and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-4). That is, in the first step-up notice, the notice result of the mail notice can be displayed while the notice effect B is being executed. In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “continue step-up”, it is possible to recognize in advance that the step-up notice will continue (change), and the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. This is an effect when the operation button 120 is pressed in the period T64. Then, the character C212 appears as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice while displaying the notice result of the mail notice (10-5). This is an effect in the period T65 to T67. Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect of causing the characters A, B, and C to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (10-6), and the right symbol (“ 7 ") is stopped and reach occurs, an effect for causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (10-7). This is the effect during periods T68 and T69.

  On the other hand, when the player does not readily operate the operation button 120, the e-mail is not opened (10-8), and is the timing at which it can be recognized that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (10-9)? ), Or the timing at which the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed (the timing at which the character C212 appears) (10-11). This is an effect in the periods T64 and T65 when the operation button 120 is not pressed in the period T64 and the operation button 120 is pressed in the period T65. Even at this time, the validity period of the operation button for the mail notice continues. In response to the operation of the operation button 120 after recognizing that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed, the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-10). This is an effect in the periods T66 and T67. On the other hand, even if the operation button 120 is operated after recognizing that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed, the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-12). This is an effect in the periods T66 and T67. In this case, the notice result of the mail notice is displayed during the period in which the notice effect C can be executed. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and an effect of causing characters A, B, and C to appear as a notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed (10-13), and the right symbol (“7”). Is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (10-14). This is the effect during periods T68 and T69.

  In this way, the step-up notice and the e-mail notice can appear at the same time, and the valid period of the operation button for the e-mail notice is a period of a plurality of steps of the step-up notice (the execution period of the notice effect B and the execution of the notice effect C). If the player wants to know the notice result of the e-mail notice as soon as possible, the e-mail is sent during the notice effect B during which the notice effect C cannot be recognized by operating early. If you want to know the notice result of the e-mail notice after recognizing whether it changes to the notice effect C, you can recognize the notice result of the notice, do not operate until the timing when the notice effect C is executed, For example, even if you are disappointed once without changing to the notice effect C, the probability of a big hit may increase depending on the notice result of the mail notice. It is possible to maintain the feeling. Therefore, since the notice effect suitable for the player can be executed according to the player's preference, the interest can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number based on the determination result whether or not to reach the jackpot determination determination result. And a variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type using a random number for variation pattern determination. Then, if it is determined to be reach, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state, and a variation pattern with a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the reach state is determined. Decide either. Further, when it is determined not to reach, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern according to the non-reach state is determined, and the plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the non-reach state are accompanied. Determine any of the fluctuation patterns. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects not only when reaching the reach state but also when not reaching the reach state without increasing the program capacity.

  Also, in this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control can be a big hit by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing according to a predetermined order during one variable display. The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect that perform step-by-step notification that there is a possibility are executed, and the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are displayed in the same period during variable display. Since it is configured to be executable simultaneously, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 changes the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and the second step at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. Since the control to change the notice effect in the up notice effect is executed, the timing of the notice effect change in the multiple step up notice effects is different. A game can be performed while expecting the occurrence, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute control to change the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a predetermined timing after the first step-up notice effect is finished. Therefore, even if one step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect) ends, the other step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) may continue to be executed. The expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 101 executes control for changing the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, control for changing the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z), the effect is given. Since the display area on the display device 9 for displaying the preview image is configured to be enlarged, the player can be impressed with the continuation of the second step-up preview effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first step-up notice effect in the first display area (lower display area) of the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is an effect display. When the control is executed in the second display area (background display area) in the device 9 and the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect is changed, the second display area is the first display. Since it is expanded over the area, the continuation of the second step-up notice effect can be further emphasized to the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can simultaneously execute the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect during the same period during variable display, and the first or second step-up notice. At least one step-up notice effect (the second step-up notice effect in the above embodiment) of the effects is executed as a notice pattern, after the notice effect (for example, notice effect Y) is executed, and then the notice effect ends. An end suggestion effect (for example, an effect in which a beetle hides in a tree) is executed, a first pattern for ending a notice based on a step-up notice effect and a notice effect (eg, a notice effect Y) are executed, and then an end suggestion effect A second pattern for executing a predetermined next notice effect (for example, notice effect Z) without executing the After executing (Ex. Y), at least three types of notice patterns are provided: a third pattern that executes an end suggestion effect and then executes a predetermined next notice effect (for example, notice effect z). . According to such a configuration, a plurality of step-up notice effects (a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve interest. In addition, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (for example, notice effect z) continues after execution of the end suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute the second step-up notice effect at a higher rate than the first step-up notice effect. Specifically, when comparing the first notice setting table for determining the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 67 with the second notice setting table for determining the second step-up notice shown in FIG. More judgment values are assigned to each effect mode in the second notice setting table than in the first notice setting table (conversely, the first notice setting table has more judgments for “none”. A value has been allocated.) According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the second step-up notice effect in which the end suggestion effect can be executed can be increased, and the player can be surely interested in the end suggestion effect, Variations of the second step-up notice effect can be increased by the end suggestion effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution period of the end suggestion effect includes a first recognition timing at which the player cannot recognize whether the next notice effect (notice effect C) is executed in the first step-up notice effect, This is a period including both timings of the second recognition timing at which the player can recognize that the next notice effect (notice effect C) is not executed. Specifically, in the specific example of the third notice effect shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (FIG. 89 (3-3)), and the character B211 Passes (FIG. 89 (3-4)), the character B211 disappears from the screen (FIG. 89 (3-5)). At this point, the player does not know whether or not the next notice effect C will be executed. This time is the first recognition timing. Thereafter, when the character C212 does not appear even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player can recognize that the next notice effect C is not executed (FIG. 90 (3-6)). This time is the second recognition timing. In this embodiment, the execution period of the end suggestion effect is a period including the first recognition timing and the second recognition timing. According to such a configuration, when the notice ends in the first step-up notice effect, the possibility that a next notice effect (for example, notice effect z) is newly executed after the end suggestion effect is maintained is maintained. It is possible to improve the interest by maintaining the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the notice effect executed in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect is an effect using a notice image (character image) displayed on the effect display device 9. Yes, the first step-up notice effect is executed in the first display area (display area at the bottom of the screen) of the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is displayed in the second display area (background background) of the effect display device 9. Since it is configured to be executed in the display area), even if a plurality of step-up notice effects are executed at the same time, the player can easily recognize and not be confused.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 moves the movable member 78 provided in the game area in addition to the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect). Can be executed to notify that there is a possibility of winning a big hit, and the change in the notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect in the above embodiment) is possible. When the control to change to the next notice effect is not executed despite the arrival of the timing, the movable object notice effect is executed after the change timing (the effects shown in FIGS. 93 and 94). Example). According to such a configuration, the moving object notice effect is performed after the step-up notice effect appears to have ended once, so that the player's expectation can be held again, and the interest is further improved. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the movable object notice effect, the notice effect (notice effect D) next to the notice effect (notice effect C) that has not been executed in the first step-up notice effect. ), The first step-up notice effect is restored when the movable object notice effect is continuously executed even if the first step-up notice effect appears to have ended. Can maintain the expectation for the occurrence of jackpots and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can be a big hit by executing a notice effect different from the notice effect that can appear in the executed step-up notice effect (for example, the first step-up notice effect). The other system notice effect (for example, other system liquid crystal notice effect) that notifies that there is a possibility can be executed, and reach is performed when control to change to a specific notice effect (for example, notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the state is to be established, and the specific advance notice is the next advance notice effect even though the change timing of the specific advance notice effect (notice effect C) is reached in the step-up advance notice effect. Configured to execute other system notice effect after change timing when control to change effect is not executed Are (directed example FIG. 96, FIG. 97). According to such a configuration, it is determined that the reach state is established when the control for changing to the specific notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed, so that the step-up notice effect is temporarily ended. The other system notice effect is executed after pretending to be, and it can regain the expectation for the occurrence of the reach state of the player, and the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the other system notice effect (other system liquid crystal notice effect), the next notice of the notice effect (notice effect C) not executed in the step-up notice effect is performed. Since it is configured to execute the effect (notice effect D), even if the step-up notice effect is finished, the step-up notice effect may be restored due to the continuous execution of the other system notice effect. , The expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the reach state is reached after the other system notice effect (other system liquid crystal notice effect) is executed, the specific reach state (super reach state) that is likely to result in a specific display result. It is preferable that Specifically, in the notice effect setting process, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined in step S587 regardless of the content of the received change pattern command, but the change corresponding to the change pattern of the super reach is shown. Only when the pattern command is received, the process of step S587 is executed. According to such a configuration, the expectation of a big hit when another system notice effect occurs can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control CPU 101 receives a big hit according to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player in addition to the step-up notice effect. The button notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the notice effect may occur can be executed, and the change timing of the notice effect (for example, notice effect C) has been reached in the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect). When the control for changing to the next notice effect is not executed, the button notice effect is executed after the change timing (example shown in FIG. 98, example shown in FIG. 99). According to such a configuration, the button notice effect that can be executed based on the operation of the operation button 120 is executed after the player is made to recognize that the step-up notice effect has once ended, and the player expects the big hit. Can hold for a long time. Further, when the big hit occurs, the step-up notice effect has once ended, so that the impression that the big hit has been generated by itself can be strongly given, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect (notice effect D) next to the notice effect (notice effect C) not executed in the step-up notice effect after executing the button notice effect. (Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, examples of effects shown in FIGS. 104 and 105), even if the step-up notice effect appears to have ended, a notice is given by operating the operation button 120. The production can be recognized as if it was newly revived, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the operation effective period (button effective period) in which the operation of the operation button 120 is effective is the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) that was executed before the button notice effect was executed. Since this is the period (examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105), the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect control CPU 101 provides a specific display result according to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player in addition to the step-up notice effect. The button notice effect can be executed to notify that there is a possibility, and the step-up notice effect and the button notice effect can be executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display. In the up-notice effect (first step-up notice effect), the first recognition timing at which the player cannot recognize whether the next notice effect (notice effect C) is executed, and the player will be notified of the next notice effect (notice effect C). ) Is a period including both timings of the second recognition timing in which it is possible to recognize that it is not executed (examples of effects shown in FIGS. 107 to 110). According to such a configuration, when the player operates the operation button 120 at the first recognition timing, the player can recognize whether or not the notice effect (notice effect C) is changed at an early stage. When the operation button 120 is operated at the recognition timing, a sense of expectation can be given again depending on whether or not the button notice effect is executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effects (button notification effects and card notification effects) are provided in advance as button notification effects, and the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the plurality of types of button notification effects. Because it is configured to be executed, the variation of the button notice effect increases, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined that the reach state is established when the control for changing to the specific notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed, and the operation of the operation button 120 is effective. The effective operation period is a period that spans the execution period of a specific notice effect and the execution period of the notice effect that was executed before the specific notice effect is executed. It will extend over both periods of the period in which the state is confirmed, and the player can operate the operation button 120 in both states with different situations to execute the notice effect, thereby improving the interest. it can.

  In this embodiment, in the first step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R) ( After the execution of the notice effect A), the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display portion (left symbol display area 9L) from which the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. The final notice effect (notice effect E, e) is executed in the second step-up notice effect, and the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R). The first notice effect (notice effect X) starts to be executed at the first stop variable display portion (left symbol display area 9L) where the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. Identification information is derived and displayed The final notice effect (notice effect E, e, notice effect) is made in a plurality of step-up notice effects. By varying the execution timing of Z, z), it is possible to feel the expectation of the big hit, and further, it is possible to reduce the step-up notice effect after the first stop, making the player pay attention to the display result of the identification information be able to.

  In this embodiment, in the first step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R) ( The execution of the notice effect A) is started, and the variable display portion (right symbol display area) other than the third stop variable display portion (middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is finally derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. 9R), the final notice effect (notice effect E, e) is executed after reaching the reach state in which the identification information is derived and displayed and constitutes a part of the combination of the specific display results. In the step-up notice effect, the execution of the first notice effect (notice effect X) is started when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R), Multiple variable In the state where the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display portion (right symbol display area 9R) other than the third stop variable display portion (middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is derived and displayed last. Since the final notice effect (notice effect Z, z) is executed before reaching the reach state (see FIG. 81), the final notice effect (notice effect E) in a plurality of step-up notice effects. , E, different notice timings Z, z), it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit, and after the third stop, the step-up notice effects can be reduced, and the player is given identification information. It is possible to focus on the display result.

  77, 79 to 81, and the like, the execution start timing of the first step-up notice and the execution start timing of the second step-up notice effect are the same, but may be different timings.

  Also, the change timing of each notice effect A, B, C, D, E, e in the first step-up notice effect and the change timing of each notice effect X, Y, Z, z in the second step-up notice effect Although the timing is different, the timing may be the same. For example, the notice effect X changes from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y at the timing when the notice effect A changes to the notice effect B, and changes from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z at the timing when the notice effect B changes to the notice effect C. You may comprise.

  In addition, it is preferable that each of the notices shown in the above embodiments can execute a plurality of kinds of notice modes (effect modes of notice effects) in the notice. For example, in the first step-up notice, the notice effect A includes a plurality of different kinds of notice effects A1, A2, A3... (For example, the color of clothes of the character A is different). In addition, the movable object notice or the blade object notice includes a plurality of different movable forms (movable speed, movable range, number of movements, etc.) as movable aspects of the movable member 78 and the blade object 79. In addition, button notifications include multiple types of display content (for example, "...", "chance", "super reach", etc., multiple types of different characters, display colors even if the display content is the same) Are different, etc.). In addition, the frame lamp notice includes a plurality of types of light emission modes (light emission speed, light emission color, etc.) as light emission modes. In addition, the mini character notice includes different appearances of different mini characters and different mini characters. The other-system liquid crystal preview includes a plurality of types of preview images (for example, seminar images and stag images) as the preview images displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Thus, any one of the production modes included in the predetermined notice is selected and executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the step-up notice, the execution rate of the notice and the notice mode (the notice effect) are determined depending on which fluctuation pattern is out of non-reach, normal reach, super reach, or big hit. The appearance rate is changed, but a notice setting table is provided for each variation pattern, and the notice value is changed according to the content of the probability change pattern. You may make it change a rate and the appearance rate of a notice aspect. For example, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, the execution rate of the step-up notification or the appearance rate of a predetermined notification mode may be improved.

  In addition, in the notices other than the step-up notice, the presence / absence of the notice and the appearance rate of the notice form (effect form of the notice effect) are changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of different notice setting tables are provided, and a plurality of different allocations are determined according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (out-going or big hit, the type of big hit in the case of big hit) or the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means. Any one of the notice setting tables may be selected, and the notice form to be executed may be determined based on the selected table and the notice determination random number. By configuring in this way, depending on the type of jackpot when it is a big hit in advance, execution of each notice depending on whether it will reach even in the event of a loss, and whether it will develop into a super reach at the time of reach The rate and the appearance rate of the notice mode can be determined. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, it is possible to improve the notice execution rate and the appearance rate of a predetermined notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the type of the variation pattern using the type random number, and determines the variation pattern in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number. However, the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the notice effect using the notice type random number, and determines the notice effect within the determined notice effect type using the notice effect determination random number. Also good. For example, it is impossible to simultaneously execute another system liquid crystal notice and a button notice executed at a later timing. The other system LCD notice displays a notice image (an image in which a cicada or a stag beetle is on a tree; see FIGS. 97 (5-5) and (5-6)) in the entire area of the display screen. This is because the button preview effect image cannot be displayed during display. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether to perform the notice of another system liquid crystal notice or the button notice as the notice effect type by using a preliminarily provided notice type random number, and then determines the decided notice type. (For example, as shown in FIG. 71 in the case of other system liquid crystal notices, either “no notice” or “execution of notice”, as shown in FIG. 70 in the case of button notice) "No notice" "First mail notice (early timing)" "First mail notice (late timing)" "Second mail notice (early timing)" "Second mail notice (late timing)" "Card notice (early timing) ) ”Or“ Card advance notice (late timing) ”). According to such a configuration, selection of a combination of notice effects that cannot be executed simultaneously can be reliably avoided.

  Further, if the type of the notice effect is determined by using the random number, the type of the notice effect is determined based on the table corresponding to the type of the decided notice effect. While changing the appearance ratio (without changing the distribution value in the notice type table for determining the type of the notice effect), changing the appearance ratio of the notice effect form (in the notice setting table for determining the notice effect form) On the contrary, the appearance ratio of the type of the notice effect is changed (although the distribution value in the notice type table is changed), but the appearance ratio of the form of the notice effect is not changed (the notice setting table). It is possible to easily realize a design change such as not changing the distribution value in (1). As a result, when changing the type of the notice effect and the appearance ratio of the notice effect according to the model change etc., it is not necessary to change all the data (table distribution values), and some data ( It can be easily realized only by changing the notice type table or the setting value of the notice setting table (that is, it is not configured to determine the type of the notice effect after determining the type of the notice effect, When it is desired to change only the appearance rate of the production mode included in the type of the predetermined notice effect, or when it is desired to make the type of the given notice effect appear at a higher rate than the type of the other notice effect, the notice in each notice It is necessary to change all the contents of the table in which the aspect of production is set, and it is difficult to realize such a change). Since the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type random number and then the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type is determined, the same effect as the above case can be obtained. That is, the contents of the variation pattern determination table when only changing the appearance rate of the variation pattern included in the predetermined variation pattern type is desired or when it is desired to cause the predetermined variation pattern type to appear at a higher rate than other variation pattern types. Must be changed, and it is difficult to realize such a change.

  In the present invention, the step-up notice effect means that a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order can be executed. This refers to an effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are more stages than when the display result is not used.

  In the first step-up notice effect, execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and a plurality of variable display parts are displayed. After the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display section (for example, the left symbol display area 9L) from which the identification information is first derived and displayed, the final notice effect (for example, the notice effects E and e) is displayed. Change (that is, after the identification information is derived and displayed in the variable display section of the first stop), in the second step-up notice effect, When the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion, the first notice effect (for example, the notice effect X) is started, and the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. 1 stop variable Before the identification information is derived and displayed in the display part (for example, the left symbol display area 9L), the final notice effect (for example, the notice effect Z, z) is changed (that is, from the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z, z). The change timing is before the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display, in other words, after the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display. There is no change timing of the notice effect in the effect).

  Also, in the first step-up notice effect, when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, the execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started, and a plurality of variable display parts The identification information is derived and displayed on a variable display portion (for example, the right symbol display area 9R) other than the last stopped variable display portion (for example, the middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is finally derived and displayed. Change to the final notice effect (for example, notice effect E, e) after reaching the reach state constituting a part of the combination of the specific display results (that is, the change timing from the notice effect D to the notice effect E, e). In the second step-up notice effect, when the identification information is variably displayed on all variable display portions, the first notice effect (for example, notice effect) ) Is started and changed to the final notice effect (for example, notice effects Z, z) before reaching the reach state (that is, before the change timing from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z, z becomes the reach state). In other words, there may be no change timing of the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect after reaching the reach state).

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol displays (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) as a variable display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a special symbol display.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and in particular, continuous variation (including pseudo continuous variation) is performed in an effect device (effect part) such as an effect display device provided in the game machine. It is preferably applied to a gaming machine.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation | movement of a movable member. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table, a jackpot type determination table, and a probability variation promotion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation performed according to the content of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a movable-object notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a button notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting another notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of various notice effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern (notice pattern) which develops from step (Y) to step (Z) or (z) in the 2nd step-up notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in a 1st step-up notice, and the content of each notice effect in a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st step-up notice as a 1st notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice as a 2nd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice as a 2nd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice as a 2nd notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 3rd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example simultaneously performed in the same period in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are variably displayed as the third notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example simultaneously performed in the same period in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are variably displayed as the third notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example simultaneously performed in the same period in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are variably displayed as the third notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 4th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 4th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 4th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 5th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an email notice as a 6th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a card notice as a 7th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 9th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th notification effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 10th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 15 Variable winning ball device 9a 1st decoration symbol display device 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 18c Total hold memory display 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
78 Movable members 79a, 79b Blades (one type of movable members)
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU

Claims (4)

A specific display result including a plurality of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and combinations of display results of identification information derived and displayed with a time difference in the plurality of variable display units Is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when
Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to combine the specific display results before the combination of the display results of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the specific display result is obtained by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display. A notice effect execution means for executing a step-up notice effect for informing stepwise that there is a possibility,
The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect,
The notice effect execution means includes:
The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed as the step-up notice effect,
In the first step-up notice effect, execution of the first notice effect is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and the identification information is the first among the plurality of variable display parts. After the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display section that is derived and displayed, the final notice effect is terminated,
In the second step-up notice effect, execution of the first notice effect is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and the identification information is the first among the plurality of variable display parts. A gaming machine, wherein the final notice effect is terminated before the identification information is derived and displayed on the first display variable display unit that is derived and displayed. A specific display result including a plurality of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and combinations of display results of identification information derived and displayed with a time difference in the plurality of variable display units Is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when
Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to combine the specific display results before the combination of the display results of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the specific display result is obtained by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display. A notice effect execution means for executing a step-up notice effect for informing stepwise that there is a possibility,
The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect,
The notice effect execution means includes:
The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed as the step-up notice effect,
In the first step-up notice effect, the execution of the first notice effect is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and the identification information is the last among the plurality of variable display parts. The final notice after the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display part other than the variable display part of the final stop that is derived and displayed, and after reaching the reach state that constitutes a part of the combination of the specific display results Finish the production,
In the second step-up notice effect, the execution of the first notice effect is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display units, and the final notice effect is given before the reach state is reached. A gaming machine characterized by being terminated. The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect,
The notice effect execution means is
As the step-up notice effect, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed simultaneously in the same period during variable display,
Control for changing the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and changing the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. The game machine according to claim 1 or claim 2 to be executed. Reach determining means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means;
Based on the determination result by the prior determination unit and the determination result by the reach determination unit, a variable display pattern type determination unit that determines the variable display pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from among variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means;
Based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means, variable display control means for executing variable display of identification information,
The variable display pattern type determining means includes
In response to the determination that the reach state is set by the reach determination means, it is determined as one of a plurality of variable display pattern types corresponding to the reach state,
In response to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determination means, determine one of a plurality of variable display pattern types according to the non-reach state,
The variable display pattern determining means includes
In response to the determination that the reach state is set to the reach state, the variable display pattern includes a plurality of types of reach variable included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination unit. Decide on one of the display patterns,
In response to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determination unit, a plurality of types of non-display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination unit are selected. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the game machine is determined as one of reach variable display patterns.

Images